Contents

Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual PDF

1 of 248
1 of 248

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual PDF

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual (For SW1DNC-CCIEF-B)

-Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 -Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the user's manual for the CPU module used. In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious consequences. Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety. Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

[Design Precautions]

[Design Precautions]

WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system

operates safely even when a fault occurs in a personal computer. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting

operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be configured external to the programmable controller.

(2) The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data link error. If this occurs, the data output from the station and written to other stations before the error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network (until its data link is restarted).Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is connected to the data link system.

For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to this manual. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

When changing data during operation, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. And determine corrective actions to be taken between the personal computer and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power

cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

2

[Security Precautions]

[Installation Precautions]

[Installation Precautions]

WARNING To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and

the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the

personal computer. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction.

Do not touch any connectors while power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction.

CAUTION Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual. Failure to do so

may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product. Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board. Doing so can

cause malfunction or failure of the board. Do not disassemble or modify the boards. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Fix the board by tightening the board-fixing screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening

may cause drop, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening may damage the screw and/or board, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction. For the tightening torque of the board-fixing screws, refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer.

Before handling the board, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction.

Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard (Page 30 Operating Environment). Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction.

Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer. Incorrect insertion of the board may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the board.

When installing the board, take care not to contact with other boards. When installing the board, take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a

surrounding member. Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated. Failure to do so may cause

a failure or malfunction. The board is included in an antistatic envelope. When storing or transporting it, be sure to put it in the

antistatic envelope. Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction. Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board. Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction.

3

[Wiring Precautions]

[Wiring Precautions]

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring. Failure to

do so may result in electric shock, damage to the product, or malfunction. After installation of the board and wiring, attach the cover on the module before turning it on for

operation. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

CAUTION Place the communication cable connected to the board in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling

cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact.

When disconnecting the cable from the board, do not pull the cable by the cable part. Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable.

Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer. Such foreign matter may cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board. Then, check for any incomplete connection. Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output.

Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.

WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before cleaning the board or retightening the board-

fixing screws. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, or cause a failure or malfunction of the board.

Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction.

Do not connect or disconnect any communication cable while power is on. Doing so may result in a malfunction.

4

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

[Disposal Precautions]

CAUTION Thoroughly read the manual and ensure the safety before performing program modification during

operation, forced output, operation such as RUN, STOP, and PAUSE. An improper operation will result in mechanical damage or accidents.

Do not disassemble or modify the boards. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Fix the board by tightening the board-fixing screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening

may cause drop, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening may damage the screw and/or board, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction. For the tightening torque of the board-fixing screws, refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer.

Before handling the board, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction.

The board is included in an antistatic envelope. When storing or transporting it, be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope. Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction.

The microprocessor built in the board will reach a high temperature during operation. Do not touch it directly when replacing the board. Doing so may result in a failure, malfunction or injury.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

5

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT (1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;

i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the

public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality

assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator,

Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.

(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

6

CONSIDERATIONS FOR USE

Interlink transfer and routing functions CC-Link IE Field Network board cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transfer function or the routing function. To use these functions, set a network module as a relay station.

Driver installation and updating The consistency between the driver and utility cannot be identified, and CC-Link IE Field Network board may not operate properly. Do not install or update the driver other than the method written in the troubleshooting. Page 141 TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi Electric network interface boards. This manual describes the required system configuration, specifications, operating procedure, functions, and troubleshooting of the relevant products listed below. Before using this product, please read this manual and the related manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the CC-Link IE Field Network interface board to handle the product correctly. Please make sure that the end users read this manual.

Relevant products Q80BD-J71GF11-T2, Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

7

C O

N TE

N TS

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 CONSIDERATIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 15 1.1 CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 19 2.1 System Configuration Using CC-Link IE Field Network Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Single Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Multi-Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.3 Network Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.4 Operating Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 34 3.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 39 4.1 Procedure Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 4.2 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Operation LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Handling precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Installation environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Procedure for replacing mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Board installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4.4 Setting Channel Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4.5 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Bus I/F test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Memory test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Hardware test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Self-loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Ethernet cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.7 Tests After Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

8

Loop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Communication test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 57 5.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 5.2 Cyclic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Data flow and link device assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Link scan and link refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Assurance of cyclic data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Input status of data link faulty station setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Cyclic transmission stop and restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5.3 Transient Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Communication on the same network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Communication with different networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

5.4 SEND/RECV Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 5.5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5.6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 5.7 Event Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 5.8 Loopback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 5.9 Driver WDT function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 79 6.1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Obtaining the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 When installation is completed normally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 When installation is aborted or failed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

6.3 Uninstallation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Uninstallation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 When uninstallation is completed normally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 When uninstallation is failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 83 7.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7.2 Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 85 8.1 Starting and Exiting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Main frame configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Work windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

8.3 Help Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 91 9.1 Creating Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 9.2 Opening Existing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 9.3 Saving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

9

C O

N TE

N TS

9.4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 9.5 Deleting Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9.6 Closing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9.7 Verifying Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 98 10.1 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10.2 Setting Network Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Network type and mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Network configuration setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Network operation setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Event setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Driver setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Target setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Routing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 112 11.1 Setting Board Channel Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 11.2 Writing/Reading Parameters to/from Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 11.3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 11.4 Resetting Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 115

CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 117 13.1 Diagnosing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Selecting the diagnostics target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Displaying diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Communication test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Network event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Reserved station function enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Enable/Disable ignore station errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 137

CHAPTER 15 PROGRAMMING 139 15.1 Precautions on Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 141 16.1 Error Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Installation failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Uninstallation failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 When the driver is not installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

16.3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Personal computer does not start or shuts down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

10

Utility does not startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 The screen or operation is abnormal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Personal computer operates slowly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

16.4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Hardware error or board WDT error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Driver WDT error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Driver does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Bus error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

16.5 Troubleshooting for Data Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Communication error (ERR. LED is ON/Flashing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 User program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules 152 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Station is disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Communication is unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

16.6 Troubleshooting for Device Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Transient transmission cannot be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

16.7 Checking method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Checking installation environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Check the board installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Checking cables and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Checking operation environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Checking personal computer and operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Checking on Device Manager screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Checking operations with event viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Checking channel numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Checking operations with board diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Checking operations with tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Checking LED status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Checking network status with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW) . . . . . . . . . . 164 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

16.8 Information Required for Inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 16.9 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

APPENDIX 176 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Redundant CPU specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Operation at occurrence of system switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Retry processing for the error that occurs during system switching processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Automatic switching of communication path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Link device area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Offset/size information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Own station information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Other station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

11

C O

N TE

N TS

Appendix 5 Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Link refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Link scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Transmission delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Appendix 7 Comparison of CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Appendix 10Added and Changed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Change of hardware function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Update of software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Appendix 11Restrictions for Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Appendix 12Windows Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Overview of warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Methods for preventing warning message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Appendix 13Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode (hibernate, sleep). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Behavior when fast startup function is enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Appendix 14MELSECPowerManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Installing MELSECPowerManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Checking MELSECPowerManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Appendix 15EMC and Low Voltage Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Appendix 16External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

INDEX 240

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

12

RELEVANT MANUALS

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.

Manual name [manual number] Description Available form CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual (For SW1DNC-CCIEF-B) [SH-080980ENG] (this manual)

System configuration, specifications, functions, handling, wiring, and troubleshooting for CC-Link IE Field Network interface board

Print book e-Manual PDF

MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual [SH-080917ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, settings, functions, programming, and troubleshooting for CC-Link IE Field Network and MELSEC-Q series CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules

Print book PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup) [SH-081256ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, wiring, and communication examples of Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC- Link IE Field Network

Print book e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application) [SH-081259ENG]

Functions, parameter settings, programming, troubleshooting, I/O signals, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE Field Network

Print book e-Manual PDF

MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual [SH-080972ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation, wiring, settings, functions, programming, and troubleshooting for CC-Link IE Field Network and MELSEC-L series CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules

Print book e-Manual PDF

MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual [SH-081035ENG]

Programming, function specifications, and sample programming for MELSEC data link library

Print book e-Manual PDF

13

TERMS Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Description Baton pass A control mechanism in which transmission right (token) is passed around the network for data transmission

Buffer memory Memory in an intelligent function module and network interface board to store data such as setting values and monitor values

CC-Link IE Field Network A high-speed and large-capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet (1000BASE-T)

Cyclic transmission A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices (RX, RY, RWw, and RWr)

Data link Communications that performed by cyclic transmission and transient transmission

Dedicated instruction An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules

Device A memory of a CPU module to store data. Devices such as X, Y, M, D, and others are provided depending on the intended use.

Intelligent device station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with the master station by cyclic transmission. This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station.

Intelligent function module A module that has functions other than an input or output, such as an A/D converter module and D/A converter module

Link device A device (RX, RY, RWr, RWw, SB, or SW) in a module and board on CC-Link IE Field Network

Link refresh Data transfer between link devices of CC-Link IE Field Network board and the driver

Link scan (link scan time) Time required for all the stations on the network to transmit data. The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests.

Link special register (SW) Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module or board on CC-Link IE Field Network

Link special relay (SB) Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module or board on CC-Link IE Field Network

Local station A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations

Loopback A function that disconnects the station in which an error has occurred, and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally. Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link.

Master station A station that controls the entire network. This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations. Only one master station can be used in a network.

Relay station A station that relays data link to other station with mounting more than one network modules on one programmable controller

Remote device station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with the master station by cyclic transmission. This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station.

Remote I/O station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) with the master station by cyclic transmission

Remote input (RX) Bit data input from a slave station to the master station (For some areas in a local station, data are input in the opposite direction.)

Remote output (RY) Bit data output from the master station to a slave station (For some areas in a local station, data are output in the opposite direction.)

Remote register (RWr) Word data input from a slave station to the master station (For some areas in a local station, data are input in the opposite direction.)

Remote register (RWw) Word data output from the master station to a slave station (For some areas in a local station, data are output in the opposite direction.)

Reserved station A station reserved for future use. This station is not actually connected, but counted as a connected station.

Routing A process of selecting paths for communication with other networks. CC-Link IE Field Network requires communication paths to be preset using routing parameters to communicate with stations on different networks.

Slave station Stations, such as a local station, remote I/O station, remote device station, and intelligent device station, other than a master station

Transient transmission A function of communication with another station, which is used when requested by a MELSEC data link library or a utility

14

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.

Generic term/abbreviation Description CC IE Field Utility A utility included in the SW1DNC-CCIEF-B CC-Link IE Field Network software package

CC-Link IE Controller Network board

Q80BD-J71GP21-SX, Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX, Q81BD-J71GP21-SX, and Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network interface boards

CC-Link IE Field Network board Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 and Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network interface boards

CC-Link Ver.2 board Q80BD-J61BT11N and Q81BD-J61BT11 CC-Link system master/local interface boards

CPU module A MELSEC iQ-R series or MELSEC-Q/L series CPU module

Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module

MD function Functions in MELSEC data link library

MELSECNET/H board Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q81BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21S-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, Q80BD-J71LP21GE, and Q80BD- J71BR11 MELSECNET/H interface boards

RAS Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability. This term refers to usability of automated equipment.

SW1DNC-CCIEF-B A product name of the software package for CC-Link IE Field Network board

Driver WDT A watchdog timer that monitors the communication status between a network board and a personal computer, or operating status of a personal computer

Network module Includes the following: CC-Link IE Field Network module CC-Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET/H module MELSECNET/10 module

Head module LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network head module

Board WDT A watchdog timer that monitors the operating status of a network board

Master/local module QJ71GF11-T2 and LJ71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network master/local modules

Remote head module RJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network remote head module

1 OVERVIEW 1.1 CC-Link IE Field Network 15

1 1 OVERVIEW

1.1 CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network is a high-speed and large-capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet technology (1000BASE-T).

Data communication High-speed and large-capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Periodic communication (cyclic transmission) Data is periodically communicated among stations within the same network. (Page 59 Cyclic Transmission)

Non-periodic communication (transient transmission) Data is communicated upon request. (Page 67 Transient Transmission)

1 Gbps communication speed 1 Gbps communication speed allows high-speed communication. Also, the tact time can be reduced due to the improved performance of communication response.

RX RX

RY RY

X

Y

W RWw RWw

RWr RWr

Personal computer Programmable controller

User program

Driver

Board Master/

local module

CPU module

1234H1234H

Write request Device Write data

CPU moduleLocal stationBoardUser program

16 1 OVERVIEW 1.1 CC-Link IE Field Network

Use of Ethernet cable A 1000BASE-T-compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface. The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE- T-compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available. (Page 29 Cables)

Flexible wiring for the system arrangements The network can be wired into star topology, line topology, and ring topology. (Page 20 Network configuration) For star topology, a 1000BASE-T design switching hub can be used. (Page 29 Hubs) Wiring is highly flexible because a network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies. For example, the control panels can be connected through a star topology and the production lines through a line topology.

1000BASE-T

Star topology

Line topology Line topology

1 OVERVIEW 1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Board 17

1 1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Board CC-Link IE Field Network board allows the connection of a personal computer to CC-Link IE Field Network. CC-Link IE Field Network board can be used as either a master station or local stations of CC-Link IE Field Network.

A personal computer can be easily connected to CC-Link IE Field Network A system which contains a personal computer as a master station or local stations of the CC-Link IE Field Network system can be configured.

System controls and high-speed data collection For a reduction of tact time in a manufacturing system, control data, logging data of manufacturing processes, management data for traceability, and management/diagnostic data for equipment predictive maintenance can be collected at high speed and monitored. A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station. Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station.

CC-Link IE Field Network

A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station.

Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station.

18 1 OVERVIEW 1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Board

User programs created using existing boards can be utilized For user programs to use CC-Link IE Field Network board, the function-level compatibility can be maintained because the common interface (MELSEC data link functions) with the existing boards can be used. Therefore, user programs created using the existing boards such as CC-Link IE Controller Network board, CC-Link Ver.2 board, MELSECNET/H board, can be utilized for CC-Link IE Field Network board. Program creation time can be shortened since the users who previously used the existing boards do not need to create a new user program.

Checking CC-Link IE Field Network status on the screen The status of CC-Link IE Field Network can be checked using CC IE Field Utility. Error locations, error causes, and event history are displayed on the screen. This helps to reduce the time for the system to recover from the error. (Page 117 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS)

main(){ mdOpen(181,-1,&path); mdSend(path,255, , ); mdClose(path); }

User programs created using the existing boards can be utilized.

CC-Link IE Field Network boardCC-Link Ver.2 board etc.

Display error locations

Display event history

Display error occurrence

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.1 System Configuration Using CC-Link IE Field Network Board 19

2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 System Configuration Using CC-Link IE Field Network Board

A system configuration when using the CC-Link IE Field Network board which is installed to a personal computer is shown below.

2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration This section explains CC-Link IE Field Network configurations.

Single Network System

Overall system configuration Single network system is a system that consists of a master station and slave stations connected by Ethernet cables as shown below. Up to 120 slave stations and 1 master station can be connected.

Software package Network interface board Communication cable Network system SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Q80BD-J71GF11-T2, Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Ethernet cable CC-Link IE Field Network

Install

Personal computer

Install Connect Connect

Network interface board

Communication cable

Network system

Software package

Switching hub

Ethernet cable (1000BASE-T)

Master station

1 station

Slave station

Up to 120 stations

20 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration

Network configuration The network can be wired into star topology, line topology, and ring topology. A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies but cannot consist of a combination of ring topology and star or line topology.

Item Description Star topology The network is formed into a star with a switching hub. Slave stations can be easily added by this topology. (Add slave stations one by

one. If multiple slave stations are added at a time, all stations on the network are reconnected. Therefore, an error may momentarily occur in all the stations.)

Line topology The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a line topology. For line topology, connections are available without using a switching hub.

Ring topology The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a ring topology. Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally.

Switching hub

Switching hub Switching hub

Star topology Line topology

Star and line mixed

Ring topology

Ethernet cable (1000BASE-T)

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration 21

2

Only the slave station in which an error has occurred is disconnected from the network. Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally. In a line topology, all stations connected after the faulty station are disconnected. In ring topology, data link continues with the stations that are operating normally.

Line topology

Ring topology

Master station (Station No.0)

Master station (Station No.0)

Error

Error

Stations after the faulty station Master station (Station No.0) are disconnected.

The system will continue data link among normal stations only.

22 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration

Multi-Network System The multi-network system is a system in which multiple networks are connected by some relay stations. Up to 239 networks can be connected.

Cyclic transmission is available only in the same network. Transient transmission is available with other networks as well as the same network. Communications can be made with stations on up to the eighth network (the number of relay stations: 7). (Page 68 Communication with different networks)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Network No.3

(Relay station)

(Relay station)

Network No.1 Network No.2

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration 23

2

Precautions

Adding slave stations (including the submaster stations) If a slave station (including a submaster station) is added to a system having 120 slave stations (including a submaster station), the system operates as follows.

When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17022' or higher Baton pass and data link are not performed in the slave stations (including the submaster stations) added after the 121st station, and other stations continues baton pass and data link. Even if the disconnected stations are returned to a system having 121 or more slave stations (including a submaster station), the stations may not start data link.

Whether 121 or more slave stations (including a submaster station) are connected can be checked using the following. "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" of CC-Link IE Field diagnostics (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen) Number of connected modules over occurrence status (SB0099) Number of connected modules detected by Number of connected modules over occurrence status (SB0099) is the total of the slave stations (including a submaster station) which are currently connected and the disconnected stations (slave stations which were previously connected).

The number of stations which were previously connected can be reset by removing the disconnected station of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen) A data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and output of the connected slave stations may turn OFF since all stations on the network will be reconnected when removing the disconnected station. Set it to maintain output data if needed. (Page 104 Network operation setting)

When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17021' or lower All stations will fail and data link cannot be performed.

Connecting devices to the same network To a switching hub on CC-Link IE Field Network, do not connect an Ethernet device (e.g. personal computer) on a network other than CC-Link IE Field Network. Doing so will cause timeout in the master station, resulting in disconnection among all stations.

24 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration

Configuration in which data link cannot be performed (incorrect ring topology) Do not wire devices as shown below. Doing so will cause an error in all stations and data link cannot be performed. Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub

Ring topology through a switching hub

Ring topology To configure a network in ring topology, set "Use" for "Loopback Function Setting" in the Network Parameter screen for the master station. (Page 102 Supplementary setting) When a module is used for the master station, check if the module version supports the loopback function. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Configuring a network in ring topology using a switching hub If a network is configured in ring topology through the two ports of the switching hub, the following problems may arise. Therefore, do not use a switching hub for ring topology. Loopback cannot be detected if an Ethernet cable is disconnected. If a station is disconnected due to failure or power-OFF, data link will stop.

Switching hub

Cannot connect both Ethernet ports to the switching hub.

Switching hub

Switching hub

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration 25

2

There is an offline mode station on a network configured in ring topology. In the following cases, the master station or the station connected to the offline mode station cannot detect loopback. Either of the Ethernet cables connected to the offline mode station is disconnected.

A station connected to the offline mode station is disconnected.

To detect loopback, set the offline mode station as a reserved station. When the offline mode station is disconnected, loopback can be detected.

No loopback is detected.

No loopback is detected.

Master station Station in Offline mode

No loopback is detected.

No loopback is detected.

Master station Station in Offline mode

Error

26 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration

Connecting/disconnecting a cable and turning OFF/ON a device This section explains the following operations.

When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17022' or higher The actual network configuration and the network map of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics may be a mismatch. Whether mismatch is occurred or not can be checked using 'Network configuration mismatch occurrence status' (SB0098). When using a ring topology, the following may be occurred. The station number of the loopback station cannot be detected correctly. Even if a switching hub is used, data link does not stop.

The actual network configuration and network configuration diagram can be matched by removing the disconnected station of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen) A data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and output of the connected slave stations may turn OFF since all stations on the network will be reconnected when removing the disconnected station. Set it to maintain output data if needed. (Page 104 Network operation setting)

When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17021' or lower A data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and outputs of the connected slave stations may turn OFF since all stations on the network will be reconnected. For a measure to above error, set the "Network Operation Setting" to maintain inputs from data link error station when outputs need to be maintained at an occurrence of a data link error. (Page 104 Network operation setting)

Network Configuration Operations Star topology Turning OFF/ON a system on a slave station or the switching hub

Connecting/disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another slave station or the switching hub

Line topology, ring topology Simultaneously turning OFF/ON systems on multiple stations Simultaneously connecting/disconnecting Ethernet cables to/from multiple stations

(When a data link error station returns, a data link error will occur in all the stations.)

Insertion/removal or turning OFF/ON

Instantaneous error on all stations.

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration 27

2

Data link error in all stations when starting a personal computer Errors occur in all stations when a personal computer is started. This is because the line between P1 and P2 of CC-Link IE Field Network board is disconnected under the following conditions. The power of the personal computer is turned OFF. (The line becomes in a conduction state when the power is turned ON.) A reconnection is in progress when starting a board driver. As a result, the following reconnection occurs and causes an error in all station. A reconnection of CC-Link IE Field Network board installed in a personal computer. A reconnection of station which is located beyond the CC-Link IE Field Network board from the point of the master station. If multiple boards are installed in a single personal computer, this symptom occurs for the same number of times as the number of installed boards.

Connected station numbers Connected station numbers should not be duplicated. Data link may be stopped when the station number is duplicated.

Turn-ON order To avoid incorrect input from slave stations, turn ON slave stations first and then the master station.

Duplication

Station No.0 Station No.1Station No.1 Station No.2

(Data link may stop.)

28 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.2 CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration

Precautions for when connecting the MELSEC iQ-R series module Note that the following points when connecting a MELSEC iQ-R series module in the system where a CC-Link IE Field Network board is used as the master station.

Connecting to a local station or remote head module of a MELSEC iQ-R series When connecting to a local station or remote head module of a MELSEC iQ-R series module, note the following points. Use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.06G or later. Use a CC-Link IE Field Network board with a serial number of which the first five digits are '16012' or higher. When using a CC-Link IE Field Network board with a serial number of which the first five digits are '16011' or lower, set the

RX/RY setting in "Network Configuration Settings" that will be assigned to the master station with the following corrective actions:

Connecting to a MELSEC iQ-R series redundant system When connecting to a MELSEC iQ-R series redundant system including CC-Link IE Field Network, note the following points. Use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.06G or later. Use a CC-Link IE Field Network board with a serial number of which the first five digits are '18042' or higher. Access to a MELSEC iQ-R series redundant CPU, in which a MELSEC data link library is used, not available. To access to

a MELSEC iQ-R series redundant system, use the supported software (GX Works3).

Action Example Set the largest end number in all stations to multiples of 32 - 1 by changing the number of cyclic assignment points or adding the reserved station.

Before change

After change

Reduce the largest end number in all stations to 7FH or less. Before change

After change

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.3 Network Components 29

2

2.3 Network Components The CC-Link IE Field Network consists of the following.

Cables For wiring, use the 1000BASE-T-compliant Ethernet cables.

For CC-Link IE Field Network wiring, use the recommended wiring components by CC-Link Partner Association.

Cables for CC-Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC-Link IE Field Network.

Product For any type of queries related to the cables for CC-Link IE Field Network, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative. Also, the connector processing of cable length is available for your preference. Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Cable types The following cable types are available depending on the operating environment. Standard type: Cables for inside the control panel and indoor connection L type: Cables for outdoor connection Also for any type of queries related to the cables and relay adapters of flame retardant or waterproof type, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Hubs Use hubs that meet the conditions listed below. Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions. Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) Support of the auto MDI/MDI-X negotiation function Support of the auto-negotiation function Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1

*1 A repeater hub is not available.

Mitsubishi Electric products

Ethernet cable Connector Standard Category 5e or more (Double shielded/STP) Straight cable

RJ45 connector The following conditioning cables: IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)

Type Model (manufacturer) CC-Link IE Field Network cable SC-E5EW series (Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.)

Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8 (discontinued product), NZ2EHG-T8N

Industrial Managed Switch NZ2MHG-T8F2

30 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.4 Operating Environment

2.4 Operating Environment The following table shows the operating environment for the CC-Link IE Field Network board and SW1DNC-CCIEF-B.

*1 Apply Windows Updates (KB4132216, KB4091664, KB4465659, and KB4480977). *2 64-bit version only *3 Apply Service Pack1 and Security Update for Windows (KB3033929). Otherwise, use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.09K or earlier. *4 32-bit version only

For the information on how to obtain SW1DNC-CCIEF-B version 1.09K or earlier, refer to the following section. Page 224 Restrictions for Operating System

Item Description Personal computer A personal computer on which Microsoft Windows operates

CPU System requirements of the operating system must be met.

Required memory

PCI bus specifications For Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 Compliant with PCI standard Rev.2.2 (3.3 VDC/5 VDC, 32-bit bus, Reference clock 33 MHz)

PCI Express bus specifications For Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Compliant with PCI Express standard Rev.1.1 (3.3 VDC, Link width 1 lane, Reference clock 100 MHz)

Available hard disk capacity 1 GB or more

Monitor Resolution: 1024 768 dots or higher

Operating system (English version) Windows Server 2019 (Standard) Windows Server 2016 (Standard)*1

Windows 10(Home, Pro, Enterprise, Education, IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC*2, IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB*2) Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 (Pro, Enterprise) Windows Server 2012 R2 (Standard) Windows 8, Windows 8 (Pro, Enterprise) Windows Server 2012 (Standard) Windows 7 (Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate, Enterprise)*3

Windows Server 2008 R2 (Standard, Enterprise)*3

When using any of the following operating systems, use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B with the version 1.09K or earlier. Windows Server 2008 (Standard (x86, x64), Enterprise (x86, x64)) Windows Vista (Home Basic, Home Premium, Ultimate, Business, Enterprise) SP2 or later*4

Windows Server 2003 R2 (Standard (x86, x64), Enterprise Edition (x86, x64)) SP2 or later Windows XP (Professional, Home Edition) SP3 or later*4

Programming language (English version)

Visual Basic and Visual C++ in the following Microsoft Visual Studio: Visual Studio 2017, Visual Studio 2015, Visual Studio 2013, Visual Studio 2012, Visual Studio 2010, Visual Studio 2008, Visual Studio 2005, Visual Studio .NET 2003

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.4 Operating Environment 31

2

Instructions for personal computer PCI standard When a personal computer which is not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express standard is used, troubles caused by failures such as a contact failure or operation error may occur. This board may not operate when a PCI Express slot for graphics is used. For details of the number of boards that can be installed, installation slots, and occupied slots, refer to the following section. Page 35 Performance Specifications

Instructions for operating system Supported version of SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

User authority Log on as a user with administrator authority. Installation and uninstallation are available only by the administrator's authority. The Usage of utilities is available only by the administrator's authority.

Secure Boot function For the following operating system, disable UEFI (BIOS) Secure Boot function or use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.13P or later. Windows 10 Version 1607 (Build number '14393' or higher)*1

*1 It is not included when upgrading from Windows 10 Version 1511 or others by using Windows 10 Anniversary Update. For the method for checking the version of an operating system and the status of Secure Boot, refer to technical bulletin FA-A- 0235.

.NET Framework 3.5 When using one of the following operating system, the .NET Framework 3.5 is required. Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2016 Windows 10 Windows 8.1 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Enable the .NET Framework 3.5 (including .NET 2.0 or 3.0) in "Turn Windows features on or off" on the control panel.

Operating system Supported version

Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016, Windows 10(IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC, IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB)

1.16S or later 1.16S or later

Windows 10 (Home, Pro, Enterprise, Education) 1.10L or later 1.10L or later

Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 1.06G or later 1.06G or later

Windows 8, Windows Server 2012 1.05F or later 1.04E or later

Windows 7 (64-bit version), Windows Server 2008 R2 1.02C or later

Windows 7 (32-bit version) All versions

Windows Server 2008 (64-bit version) 1.05F to 1.09K 1.02C to 1.09K

Windows Server 2008 (32-bit version) 1.09K or earlier

Windows Vista

Windows Server 2003 R2 (64-bit version) 1.02C to 1.09K

Windows Server 2003 R2 (32-bit version) 1.09K or earlier

Windows XP

32 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.4 Operating Environment

Upgrading and updating an operating system The following upgrade and update of an operating system are not supported: Upgrade Windows 10 major update (version upgrade) Update from Windows 8 to Windows 8.1 Install SW1DNC-CCIEF-B by following the procedure:

1. Uninstall SW1DNC-CCIEF-B.

2. Upgrade or update the operating system.

3. Install SW1DNC-CCIEF-B with the software version supporting the changed operating system.

The functions cannot be used When using any of the following functions, this product may not operate properly. Activating the application with Windows compatible mode. Simplified user switch-over Remote desktop Power save mode (Hibernate, Sleep) Fast startup The language switching function set by Regional and Language Options Windows XP Mode Windows Touch or Touch Modern UI Client Hyper-V Server Core Installation Tablet mode Virtual desktop Unified Write Filter In the following cases, the screen of this product may not work properly. The size of the text and other items in the screen is other than 100% (96 DPI, 9 pt etc.). The resolution of the screen is changed in operation. The multi-display is set. Surrogate pair characters are not available.

When exiting the operating system, always shut down the computer. For the behavior when entering the power save mode, refer to the following section.

(Page 230 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup)

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.4 Operating Environment 33

2

Instructions for user program Supported version of SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

*1 Programs can be created and executed on the 64-bit version operating system. *2 Programs can be created on the 32-bit version operating system, however, the following screen appears and cannot be executed.

Language environment User programs created in the Japanese environment work only in the Japanese environment. User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment.

MELSEC data link library For precautions when using MELSEC data link library, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

User program Supported version 32-bit version user program*1 All versions

64-bit version user program*2 1.02C or later

34 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications

3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains general and performance specifications of CC-Link IE Field Network board.

3.1 General Specifications General specifications of CC-Link IE Field Network board are shown below.

*1 Do not use or store the board under the environment where the atmospheric pressure is higher than the one at the altitude of 0 m. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

*2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V.

*3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used. Pollution degree 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.

The general specifications both CC-Link IE Field Network board and a personal computer must be satisfied after installation.

Item Specification Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55

Storage ambient temperature -25 to 75

Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient humidity

Vibration resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Constant acceleration

Half amplitude Sweep count

Under intermittent vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm 10 times each in X, Y, and Z directions8.4 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/

Under continuous vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz 1.75 mm

8.4 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions)

Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases

Operating altitude*1 0 to 2000 m

Installation location Inside a control panel

Overvoltage category*2 or less

Pollution degree*3 2 or less

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.2 Performance Specifications 35

3

3.2 Performance Specifications Performance specifications of the CC-Link IE Field Network board are shown below.

*1 This indicates the point which can be assigned for one station by master station. For local station, the data from other station can be received other than these points.

*2 For "Online (High-speed mode)", 256 points and 512 bytes. (Page 100 Network type and mode)

Item Specification Maximum link points per network RX 16384 points, 2 KB

RY 16384 points, 2 KB

RWr 8192 points, 16 KB

RWw 8192 points, 16 KB

Maximum link points per station

Master station RX 16384 points, 2 KB

RY 16384 points, 2 KB

RWr 8192 points, 16 KB

RWw 8192 points, 16 KB

Local station*1 RX 2048 points, 256 bytes

RY 2048 points, 256 bytes

RWr 1024 points, 2048 bytes*2

RWw 1024 points, 2048 bytes*2

Communication speed 1 Gbps

Connection cable An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher (double shielded, STP), straight cable (Page 29 Cables)

Maximum station-to-station distance 100 m (compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)) (Page 49 Precautions for Ethernet cable)

Overall cable distance Line topology: 12000 m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations) Star topology: Depends on the system configuration Ring topology: 12100 m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)

Number of cascade connections Up to 20

Network topology Line topology, star topology (coexistence of line topology and star topology is possible.), ring topology

Number of connectable stations per network

Master station 1 station (up to 120 slave stations can be connected to master station)

Local station 120 stations

Maximum number of networks 239

Communication method Token passing method

Item Specification

Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Number of boards that can be installed

Up to 4

Installation slot PCI slot or PCI-X slot (Half size)

PCI Express x1, x4, x8, x16 slot (Standard/low profile, half size)

Occupied slots 1 slot 1 slot

Internal current consumption 1.10 A (5 VDC) 1.68 A (3.3 VDC)

Weight 0.11 kg Standard size: 0.08 kg Low profile size: 0.07 kg

36 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses

3.3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The buffer memory is used for exchanging data between the CC-Link IE Field Network board and the master/local module. The content of the buffer memory returns to the default (initial values) when the power is turned OFF or the CC-Link IE Field Network board is reset.

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Initial value

Read, write Reference

0 to 1023 (0 to 3FFH)

Link device area Remote input (RX) 0 Read Page 182 Link device area1024 to 2047

(400H to 7FFH) Remote output (RY) Read, write

2048 to 10239 (800H to 27FFH)

Remote register (RWw)

10240 to 18431 (2800H to 47FFH)

Remote register (RWr) Read

18432 to 18463 (4800H to 481FH)

Link special relay (SB) 18432 to 18433 for read and write

18434 to 18463 for read only

18464 to 18975 (4820H to 4A1FH)

Link special register (SW) 18464 to 18495 for read and write

18496 to 18975 for read only

18976 to 19455 (4A20H to 4BFFH)

System area

19456 (4C00H)

RX offset/size information Station No.1 RX offset 0 Read Page 184 RX offset/size information (Address 19456 to 19695 (4C00H to 4CEFH))

19457 (4C01H)

Station No.1 RX size

to to

19694 (4CEEH)

Station No.120 RX offset

19695 (4CEFH)

Station No.120 RX size

19696 to 19711 (4CF0H to 4CFFH)

System area

19712 (4D00H)

RY offset/size information Station No.1 RY offset 0 Read Page 184 RY offset/size information (Address 19712 to 19951 (4D00H to 4DEFH))

19713 (4D01H)

Station No.1 RY size

to to

19950 (4DEEH)

Station No.120 RY offset

19951 (4DEFH)

Station No.120 RY size

19952 to 19967 (4DF0H to 4DFFH)

System area

19968 (4E00H)

RWw offset/size information Station No.1 RWw offset 0 Read Page 185 RWw offset/ size information (Address 19968 to 20207 (4E00H to 4EEFH))

19969 (4E01H)

Station No.1 RWw size

to to

20206 (4EEEH)

Station No.120 RWw offset

20207 (4EEFH)

Station No.120 RWw size

20208 to 20223 (4EF0H to 4EFFH)

System area

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses 37

3

20224 (4F00H)

RWr offset/size information Station No.1 RWr offset 0 Read Page 185 RWr offset/ size information (Address 20224 to 20463 (4F00H to 4FEFH))

20225 (4F01H)

Station No.1 RWr size

to to

20462 (4FEEH)

Station No.120 RWr offset

20463 (4FEFH)

Station No.120 RWr size

20464 to 20511 (4FF0H to 501FH)

System area

20512 (5020H)

Own station information (network card information)

Manufacturer code 0 Read Page 186 Network card information (Address 20512 to 20515 (5020H to 5023H))

20513 (5021H)

Model type

20514 (5022H)

Model code 1

20515 (5023H)

Version

20516 to 20519 (5024H to 5027H)

System area

20520 (5028H)

Own station information (controller information)

Controller information valid/invalid flag

0 Read, write Page 186 Controller information (Address 20520 to 20536 (5028H to 5038H))

20521 (5029H)

Manufacturer code

20522 (502AH)

Model type

20523 (502BH)

Model code

20524 (502CH)

Version

20525 to 20534 (502DH to 5036H)

Model name string

20535 to 20536 (5037H to 5038H)

Vendor-specific device information

20537 to 20538 (5039H to 503AH)

System area

20544 (5040H)

Other station information (station No.1) (network card information)

Manufacturer code 0 Read Page 187 Station number 1 (Address 20544 to 20575 (5040H to 505FH))

20545 (5041H)

Model type

20546 (5042H)

Model code

20547 (5043H)

Version

20548 to 20551 (5044H to 5047H)

System area

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Initial value

Read, write Reference

38 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3.3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses

Do not write data to "System area". Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.

20552 (5048H)

Other station information (station No.1) (controller information)

Controller information valid/invalid flag

0 Read Page 187 Station number 1 (Address 20544 to 20575 (5040H to 505FH))

20553 (5049H)

Manufacturer code

20554 (504AH)

Model type

20555 (504BH)

Model code

20556 (504CH)

Version

20557 to 20566 (504DH to 5056H)

Model name string

20567 to 20568 (5057H to 5058H)

Vendor-specific device information

20569 to 20575 (5059H to 505FH)

System area

20576 to 24383 (5060H to 5F3FH)

Other station information (station No.2 to No.120)

Same as other station information (station No.1)

24384 to 32767 (5F40H to 7FFFH)

System area

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Initial value

Read, write Reference

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.1 Procedure Before Operation 39

4

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

4.1 Procedure Before Operation This section explains the procedure before operating the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Page 80 Installation

Page 44 Board installation

Page 45 Setting Channel Numbers

Page 46 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board)

Page 49 Wiring

Page 98 SETTING PARAMETERS

Page 53 Tests After Wiring

Start

Check

Install the software package on a personal computer.

Install the software package

Install the board

Install the board to a slot on the personal computer.

Set the channel number

Set the channel number and confirm it with the utility.

Check the board

Test the hardware of the installed board.

Wire the cables

Wire the network cables for the installed board.

Set the parameters

Set the parameters and check them with the utility.

Check the network

Test the cable connection and data link on the network.

Execute a user program

Execute a user program or utility.

End

40 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.2 Part Names

4.2 Part Names This section explains each part name of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Q80BD-J71GF11-T2

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 (standard size)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.2 Part Names 41

4

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 (low profile size)

Operation LED The operating status of the CC-Link IE Field Network board is displayed. If an error occurred, refer to the troubleshooting and take a corrective action. (Page 161 Checking LED status)

When the RUN LED is OFF or ON The same LED display as a network module.

Number Name Description Reference (1) Operation LED Indicates the operating status of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 41 Operation LED

(2) P1 PORT1 connector for connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network. Page 42 Connector

(3) P2 PORT2 connector for connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network.

Name Status Description RUN ON Operating normally.

OFF One of the following error has occurred. A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred. The driver is not started.

ERR. ON One of the following error has occurred. An error is detected in all stations. Stations with same station number exist on the network. Network parameters are corrupted. Network parameters do not match the installation status.

(Reserved station specification, number of connected stations, network number etc.)

Flashing A data link error station is detected.

OFF Operating normally

SD ON Sending data

OFF Data not sent

RD ON Receiving data

OFF Data not received

(1)

(2)

(3)

42 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.2 Part Names

When the RUN LED is flashing An error which is peculiar to boards has occurred.

When checking channel number The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the "Channel No. Setting" screen. (Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers).

Connector The PORT1 and PORT2 connector for CC-Link IE Field Network.

RJ45 connector Connect an Ethernet cable. (Page 51 Ethernet cable connection)

Connector part LED Display the link status and reception status of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Name Status Description RUN Flashing One of the following error has occurred. (Check ERR.LED, and RD LED.)

ERR. ON PCI bus/PCI Express bus error has occurred.

RD ON Driver WDT error has occurred.

Name Status Description L ER ON The module received abnormal data.

The board is performing loopback.

OFF The module received normal data. The board does not perform loopback.

LINK ON Linkup in progress.

OFF Linkdown in progress.

<181> <182> <183> <184>

L ER LED

LINK LED

RJ45 connector

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.3 Installation 43

4

4.3 Installation This section explains precautions for handling and installation environment of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Handling precautions The following explains precautions for handling.

Precautions for turning on Do not touch any connectors while power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction.

Handling precautions of the board Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board. Doing so can cause malfunction or

failure of the board. Do not disassemble or modify the boards. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Before handling the board, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the

human body. Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction. Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated. Failure to do so may cause a failure or

malfunction. The board is included in an antistatic envelope. When storing or transporting it, be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope.

Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction. Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board. Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction.

Installation environment For installation of the personal computer in which the CC-Link IE Field Network board is installed, refer to the manual for the personal computer.

Precautions for board installation environment Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.

Precautions for personal computer installation environment Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.

44 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.3 Installation

Procedure for replacing mounting brackets The following shows the procedure for replacing a standard-size mounting bracket with a low profile-size mounting bracket.

*1 Keep the unused brackets in secure place. *2 Screw tightening torque: 0.425 to 0.575 Nm (4.34 to 5.86 kgfcm)

Board installation The board installation procedure is as follows:

Start

Loosen the screws.

Remove a standard-size mounting bracket.*1

Adjust a low profile-size mounting bracket to holes for fixing the mounting bracket of board.

Tighten the screws.*2

Completion

Standard-size mounting bracket

Screw

Screw

Low profile-size mounting bracket

Power OFF the personal computer.

Power OFF

Start

Install the board

Install the board to a slot on a personal computer.

Fix the board to a slot on the personal computer using the board-fixing screws.

Fix the board

Power ON

Power ON the personal computer.

Completion

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.4 Setting Channel Numbers 45

4

Precautions for turning on Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction.

Precautions for installing the board Fix the board by tightening the board-fixing screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening may cause drop,

short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening may damage the screw and/or board, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction. For the tightening torque of the board-fixing screws, refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer.

Before handling the board, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction.

Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard (Page 30 Operating Environment). Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction.

Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer. Incorrect insertion of the board may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the board.

When installing the board, take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member. When installing the board, take care not to contact with other boards.

4.4 Setting Channel Numbers Channel number is set per board, and used to identify the board. 181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default and the range of 181 to 184 can be set. Channel numbers being set are used to specify the target boards in setting parameters and performing the MELSEC data link library function. When using two or more boards in a single personal computer, set channel numbers not to overlap.

Setting method Set the channel numbers on the "Channel No. Setting" screen in CC IE Field Utility. (Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers)

Channel numbers set on the "Channel No. Setting" screen is saved to the CC-Link IE Field Network board. The channel numbers being set are retained when performing the following operations. Rebooting a personal computer Board installation position change Board replacement to another personal computer

46 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.5 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board)

4.5 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board)

This section explains the CC-Link IE Field Network board tests before network wiring.

Ethernet cable Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the CC-Link IE Field Network board in testing a board alone. Doing so may cause the test to fail.

Bus I/F test Bus I/F test checks the hardware of the Bus I/F function of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. The following shows a procedure for performing a test.

Operating procedure

Memory test Memory test checks the hardware of the memory function of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. The following shows a procedure for performing a test.

Operating procedure

1. Select a board to be tested on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in CC IE Field Utility (Page 117 Diagnosing Board).

2. Set Mode to "Bus I/F Test" and click the [Start Test] button.

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

3. The result is displayed on "Test Result" field. If the test is completed abnormally, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

1. Select a board to be tested on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in CC IE Field Utility (Page 117 Diagnosing Board).

2. Set Mode to "Memory Test" and click the [Start Test] button.

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.5 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board) 47

4

Hardware test Hardware test checks the hardware in the CC-Link IE Field Network board. The following shows a procedure for performing a test.

Operating procedure

Operation during hardware test Do not access the buffer memory in user program during the hardware test. Doing so may cause the test to fail.

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

3. The result is displayed on "Test Result" field. If the test is completed abnormally, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

1. Select a board to be tested on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in CC IE Field Utility (Page 117 Diagnosing Board).

2. Set Mode to "H/W Test" and click the [Start Test] button.

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

3. The result is displayed on "Test Result" field. If the test is completed abnormally, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

48 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.5 Tests Before Wiring (Standalone Tests of the Board)

Self-loopback test Self-loopback test checks the hardware of the CC-Link IE Field Network board alone, including the send/receive circuit of the transmission system and cables. The following shows a procedure for performing a test.

Operating procedure

When conducting the self-loopback test, use a normal Ethernet cable. (Page 29 Cables)

1. Connect Ethernet cables to the RJ45 connector (PORT1) and RJ45 connector (PORT2) of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

2. Select a board to be tested on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in CC IE Field Utility (Page 117 Diagnosing Board).

3. Set Mode to "Self-Loopback Test" and click the [Start Test] button.

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

4. The result is displayed on "Test Result" field. If the test is completed abnormally, replace the Ethernet cable and execute the test again. If the test is completed abnormally again, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.6 Wiring 49

4

4.6 Wiring This section explains the cable wiring and precautions. For Ethernet cables and hubs used for the wiring, and network configuration, refer to the system configuration. (Page 19 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION)

Wiring Precautions The following explains wiring precautions.

Precautions for turning on Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring. Failure to do so may result in

electric shock, damage to the product, or malfunction. After installation of the board and wiring, attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation. Failure to do so

may result in electric shock.

Precautions for laying Ethernet cables Place the communication cable connected to the board in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cables may swing or

inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact. Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer. Such foreign matter may cause a

fire, failure, or malfunction. Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or

more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise. Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board. Then, check for any incomplete connection. Poor

contact may cause an erroneous input or output. Do not touch the core of the cable-side or board-side connector, and protect it from dirt or dust. If oil from your hand, dirt or

dust is attached to the core, it can increase transmission loss, arising a problem in data link. Attach a connector cover to a connector which is not connected to an Ethernet cable to prevent foreign matter such as dirt

or dust.

Precautions for Ethernet cable Check the following:

(1) Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? (2) Does any Ethernet cable short? (3) Are the connectors securely connected?

Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction. The maximum station-to-station distance is 100m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the operating

environment of the cable. For details, contact your cable manufacturer. The bend radius of the Ethernet cable is limited. For details, see the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used.

50 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.6 Wiring

Precautions for connecting and disconnecting Ethernet cable Misalignment of the connecting slot of the personal computer may lead to a slight installation error. When the board-side

connector is covered with the personal computer, Ethernet cable cannot be connected properly. Check the board installation status not to overlap the connector and the personal computer.

When disconnecting the cable from the board, do not pull the cable by the cable part. Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable.

Depending on the adjacent boards and installing slot position, disconnecting the Ethernet cable may be difficult. In this case, use the following dedicated tool.

Product name Model name Maker Patch cord removal tool PCRT1 Panduit Corp.

Board-side connector

Personal computer

Proper alignment Misaligned

The connector is not covered with the personal computer.

The connector is not appeared and can not connect the cable.

Patch cord removal tool

Cable-side connector

Latch

Board-side connector

CC-Link IE Field Network board

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.6 Wiring 51

4

Ethernet cable connection The following explains the Ethernet cable connection.

Connecting the cable 1. Turn off a personal computer on which the CC-Link IE

Field Network board is installed, and the connected device.

2. Push the Ethernet cable connector into the CC-Link IE Field Network board and connected device until it clicks. Pay attention to the connector's direction.

3. Turn on the personal computer. 4. Turn on the connected device. 5. Check whether the LINK LED of the CC-Link IE Field

Network board connected with an Ethernet cable is ON. The time between the power-ON and the LINK LED turning ON may vary. The LINK LED usually turns ON in a few seconds. Note, however, that the time may be extended further if the linkup process is repeated depending on the status of the device on the line. If the LINK LED does not turn ON, refer to the troubleshooting section and take a corrective action. (Page 141 TROUBLESHOOTING)

LINK LED

52 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.6 Wiring

PORT1 and PORT2 connectors need not to be distinguished. When only one connector is used in star topology, either PORT1 or PORT2 connector can be used.

When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology, an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination. For example, the cable can be connected between PORT1s and between PORT1 and PORT2.

Disconnecting the cable 1. Power OFF the system. 2. Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable.

Either one can be used.

LINK

P1

L ER

LINK

P2

L ER

LINK

P1

L ER

LINK

P2

L ER

LINK

P1

L ER

LINK

P2

L ER

LINK

P1

L ER

LINK

P2

L ER

QJ71GF11-T2 QJ71GF11-T2 QJ71GF11-T2 QJ71GF11-T2

Connection between PORT1s or PORT2s

Connection between PORT1 and PORT2

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.7 Tests After Wiring 53

4

4.7 Tests After Wiring This section describes loop and cable tests that should be performed after network wiring. Perform these tests to the actual operating network configuration.

Loop test The loop test checks the network cable connection status and line status from master station and the parameter setting status of each station. Confirm whether the network is operating correctly by performing loop test before data link. The test allows checking the following items.

Executing loop tests The following explains a procedure for loop test, assuming the executing station (master station) is the CC-Link IE Field Network board and the target station (local station) as the CC-Link IE Field Network module.

The loop test can be executed only when the CC-Link IE Field Network board is the master station. When it is the local station, execute the test from the master station in the network system to which the local station is connected.

Preparing loop tests Prepare the following before loop test.

Operating procedure 1. Check for the power discontinuity Turn OFF the personal computer. Turn OFF the module.

2. Cable connection Connect Ethernet cables to each station.

3. Turn-ON Turn ON the personal computer. Turn ON the module.

Executing loop tests The executing station (master station) performs a loop test.

Operating procedure

Item Description Master station duplication check Check if master stations on the network are duplicated.

Station number duplication check Check if stations on the network are duplicated.

Out-of-range station No. check Check if slave stations exceeding the number of slave stations set for the master station are connected.

Reserved station specification check Check if specified reserved stations are actually connected.

Consistency check of the number of connected stations

Consistency check for the number of total slave stations set by parameters and actual connected slave stations.

Station type check Consistency check for the station type of slave stations set in master stations and actual connected station type.

Loopback check Detect if loopback is being performed while "Use" is set for "Loopback Function Setting" in the Network Parameter of the master station.

1. Select a board to be tested on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in CC IE Field Utility (Page 117 Diagnosing Board).

54 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.7 Tests After Wiring

During the loop test, data link stops on all stations. When a faulty station cannot be displayed on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen

The following errors may have occurred. Master station duplication Station number duplication Slave station type error When the faulty station is a module, identify the error causes on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2. When the faulty station is a board, identify the error causes on the "Board Diagnostics" screen. (Page 117 Diagnosing Board)

Cable test Cable test checks if the Ethernet cables are properly connected. Only an Ethernet cable connected to the PORT1 or PORT2 of the target station is tested. For the whole network status, check the loop test. (Page 53 Loop test)

Operating procedure

2. Set Mode to "Loop Test" and click the [Start Test] button.

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

3. The result is displayed on "Test Result" field. If the test is completed abnormally, check the error cause on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen, process the error. (Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network)

1. Start Utility on the computer where CC-Link IE Field Network board is installed.

2. The "Cable test" screen is displayed.

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] [Cable Test] button

3. Enter a station number to conduct a cable test and click the [Execute Test] button so that the test can be operated. When an error occurs, take actions according to the error message.

4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.7 Tests After Wiring 55

4

Communication test Communication test checks if transient transmission data can be properly routed from the own station to the communication target. Take the following system configuration as an example of communication test procedure.

Operating procedure

1. Start Utility on the computer where CC-Link IE Field Network board is installed.

2. Set the routing parameters on the "Routing Parameter Setting" screen as shown in the figure to left.

(Page 108 Routing parameters)

3. Write the network parameters being set to the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

[Online] [Write to Board] 4. Reset the board.

[Online] [Reset operation] 5. Open the "Communication Test" screen and set data to

"Communication Destination Setting" and "Communication Data Setting".

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] [Communication Test] button

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

Network No.1

Network No.2

Network No.3

Station No.2

Station No.0

Station No.0

Station No.0

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Own station (request source)

Communication target

(Relay station 1)

(Relay station 2)

Station No.3

Routing parameters for stations of network No.1

Routing parameters for stations of network No.2

Routing parameters for stations of network No.3

No setting is required for station No.3 because data are transmitted via the station itself.

No setting is required for station No.0 because data are transmitted via the station itself.

No setting is required for station No.2 because data are transmitted via the station itself.

No setting is required for station No.3 because data are transmitted via the station itself.

56 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4.7 Tests After Wiring

When conducting the test on relay stations, set the receiving (relay) station in "Communication Destination Setting". Setting the sending (relay) station will cause an error.

6. Click the [Execute Test] button to perform the communication test. If an error occurs, take actions according to the error message.

Network No.1 Network No.2

Station No.0

Station No.0

Station No.1

Station No.2

Sending (relay) station

Receiving (relay) station

Own station (request source)

5 FUNCTIONS 5.1 Function List 57

5

5 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

5.1 Function List The following table explains the function list of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Cyclic transmission

Transient transmission

Function Description Reference Communication with other stations

Communication by RX and RY

I/O data in bit units is communicated between the own station and other stations.

Page 59 Cyclic Transmission

Page 101 Network configuration setting

Communication by RWw and RWr

I/O data in word units is communicated between the own station and other stations.

Link refresh Transfer between the link device of the CC-Link IE Field Network board and the device of the driver is performed automatically.

Page 62 Link scan and link refresh

Page 106 Driver setting

Mode selection for cyclic transmission This mode is selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the cyclic transmission and transient transmission frequency. The mode can be selected from "Online (Normal mode)" and "Online (High- speed mode)".

Page 100 Network type and mode

Page 218 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes

Link scan mode setting Constant link scan setting can be selected to execute the link scan at a constant time interval.

Page 102 Supplementary setting

Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station-based units. Page 63 Assurance of cyclic data integrity

Page 102 Supplementary setting

Input status setting for data link faulty station Select whether the input data from another station where the data link error occurred is cleared or held.

Page 65 Input status of data link faulty station setting

Page 104 Network operation setting

Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations, cyclic transmission is stopped (Data reception from the slave station and data transmission from own stations are stopped). Also, the stopped cyclic transmission is restarted. Transient transmission is not stopped.

Page 66 Cyclic transmission stop and restart

Page 131 Link start/stop

Function Description Reference Communication by MELSEC data link library function

Communicate with other station's programmable controller by MELSEC data link library function. Device reading and writing of other station's programmable controller Remote operation to other station's programmable controller Data reading and writing of an intelligent device station

Page 67 Communication on the same network

Page 69 SEND/RECV Function

Page 137 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY

Seamless transmission with different networks Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient transmission to stations in different networks. Communication is also possible with the CC-Link IE Controller Network, and MELSECNET/H.

Page 68 Communication with different networks

Page 108 Routing parameters

58 5 FUNCTIONS 5.1 Function List

RAS function

Diagnostic function

Other functions

Function Description Reference Slave station disconnection Only the stations where an error has occurred, including slave stations, are

disconnected from the network, and the data link is continued only with the stations operating normally. In a line topology system, stations after the station where the error occurred are disconnected.

Automatic return When a station disconnected from a network due to a data link error recovers from the error, the station is automatically reconnected to the network and restarts data link.

Loopback function This function disconnects only faulty stations, and continues data link with only normal stations. It also continues data link with normal stations connected after the faulty station which is disconnected in a line topology.

Page 77 Loopback Function

Function Description Reference CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics The status of the CC-Link IE Field Network can be checked by CC IE Field

Utility. The faulty area, cause of the fault and its corrective action, and event history can be checked.

Page 118 Diagnosing CC- Link IE Field Network

Individual board diagnostics

Bus I/F test Check the hardware related to the bus I/F function of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Page 46 Bus I/F test

Memory test Check the memory of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 46 Memory test

Hardware test Check the hardware in the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 47 Hardware test

Self-loopback test Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Page 48 Self-loopback test

Own network diagnostics

Loop test Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each station. Page 53 Loop test

Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable. Page 54 Cable test

Other network diagnostics

Communication test Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from the own station to the target station is correct.

Page 55 Communication test

Function Description Reference Reserved station specification The reserved stations are included in the number of stations that will be

connected to the network in the future without actually connecting them. Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are not actually connected.

Page 74 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function

Page 101 Network configuration setting

Page 134 Reserved station function enable

Reserved station function disable Reserved stations can be temporarily disabled without changing parameters.

Error invalid station and temporary error invalid station setting

The master station does not detect a slave station as a faulty station even if the slave station is disconnected during data link. This can be used when a slave station is replaced during data link, for instance.

Page 75 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function

Page 101 Network configuration setting

Page 135 Enable/ Disable ignore station errors

Event notification to program Event conditions are checked every link scan, and if the event conditions are met, notifies events to the user program.

Page 76 Event Function Page 104 Event setting

Driver WDT function This function monitors the operation of the software (operating system, driver) inside the hardware.

Page 78 Driver WDT function

Parameter setting function for CC-Link IE Field Network remote device station

The parameters of CC-Link IE Field Network remote device station can be set by using mdRemBufWriteEx function or mdRemBufReadEx function of MELSEC data link library.

MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission 59

5

5.2 Cyclic Transmission This function performs periodical data communication across same network stations during cyclic transmission. For data communication, link devices (RX, RY, RWw, and RWr) are used.

Data flow and link device assignment

Master and slave stations (except for local stations) One-to-one communication is possible between the master and slave stations. The status information of the link devices (RY, RWw) of the master station is output to the external device of the slave station, and the input status information from the external device of the slave station is stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station.

Output from the master station

Input from the slave station

The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function. The status data of the driver are stored in the link devices (RY, RWw) of the master station (board) by link refresh. The status data of the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station are stored in the link devices (RY, RWw) of each slave station by link scan. The status data of the link devices (RY, RWw) of the slave station are output to the external device.

The status data of the external device are stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of the slave station. The status data of the link devices (RX, RWr) of the slave station are stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station by link scan. The status data of the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station (board) are stored in the driver by link refresh. The status data of the driver are stored in the user program by MD function.

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

Personal computer Station No. 0 Station No. 1 Station No. 2

User program

Driver

MD function

Link refresh

Master station (Board)

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Link scan Slave station Slave station

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

External device

External device

Area for sending to other stations

60 5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission

Master and local stations Data can be written into the send range of each station's link device (RY, RWw) and can be sent to any station on the same network. The status data of the link devices (RY, RWw) of the master station are stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of each local station. The status data of the link devices (RY, RWw) of local stations are stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station and the link devices (RY, RWw) of other local stations.

Output from the master station

Input from the local station

The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function. The status data of the driver are stored in the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station (board) by link refresh. The status data of the link device (RY, RWw) of the master station is stored in the link device (RX, RWr) of the local station by link scan. The status data of the link device (RX, RWr) of the local station (board) is stored in the driver

The status data of the driver is stored in the own station send range of the link device (RY, RWw) of the local station (board) by link refresh. The status data of the link devices (RY, RWw) of the local station are stored in the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station by link scan. The status data of the link devices (RX, RWr) of the master station (board) are stored in the driver by link refresh. The status data of the driver are stored in the user program by MD function.

RX,RWr RX,RWr RX,RWr

RY,RWw RY,RWw RY,RWw

Local station

Area for sending to other stations

Personal computer Station No. 0 Station No. 1 Station No. 2 Personal computer

User program

Driver Driver

MD function

Link refresh

Link scan

Link refresh

Master station (Board)

User program

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Local station (Board)

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Send range from station

No. 1 Send range from station

No. 2

5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission 61

5

Coexistence of local stations and the other slave stations (other than local stations) The data of all slave stations are also stored in the local stations in the same way as the master station.

Setting method The link devices can be assigned in "Network Configuration Setting". (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

RX,RWr

RX,RWr

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

RY,RWw

RY,RWw

Send range from station

No. 2

Station No. 0 Station No. 1 Station No. 2 Station No. 3Personal computer

User program

Driver

MD function

Link refresh

Master station (Board)

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 3

Send range to station

No.1 Send range

to station No.2

Send range to station

No. 3

Slave station Slave station Local station

Send range from station

No. 1

Send range from station

No. 3

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 3

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Area for sending to other stations

62 5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission

Link scan and link refresh Link scan is executed 'asynchronously' with the link refresh which is executed by the CC-Link IE Field Network board driver.

Setting method Link refresh is executed at the interval of time set for "Link refresh cycle" on the "Driver setting" screen of CC IE Field Utility. (Page 106 Driver setting)

Link refresh time Link refresh time can be checked on the "Board Diagnostics" screen. (Page 117 Diagnosing Board) The link refresh may not be executed in the set cycle because of such factors described below. Performance of the personal computer CPU Number of set refresh points Number of installed CC-Link IE Field Network boards Other running applications Other running boards

If the link refresh time exceeds the link refresh cycle set on the "Device setting" screen, extend the link refresh cycle. (Page 106 Driver setting)

If the shortened link refresh time effects the operation of the applications, extend the link refresh cycle. (Page 106 Driver setting)

Link refresh time

Link scan

(Setting time) (Setting time) (Setting time) (Setting time)

Link refreshLink refresh Link refresh

5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission 63

5

Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity can be assured in 32-bit units or for each station.

32-bit data assurance The RWw and RWr data can be assured in 32-bit units.

Setting method Disable "Block Data Assurance per Station" on the "Supplementary Setting" screen in "Network Configuration Setting". (Page 102 Supplementary setting) To enable 32-bit data assurance, disable "Block Data Assurance per Station".

Access to cyclic data When accessing link refresh target devices, the integrity of the 32-bit data can be assured by accessing RWw and RWr with the following conditions satisfied. Start device number of RWw/RWr is a multiple of 2. The number of points assigned to RWw/RWr is a multiple of 2.

For data assurance of more than 32 bits, use the block data assurance per station or interlock programs.

Clear the check box.

64 5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission

Block data assurance per station Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshaking between the driver and the CC-Link IE Field Network board by a link refresh.

Setting method Enable "Block Data Assurance per Station" on the "Supplementary Setting" in "Network Configuration Setting". (Page 102 Supplementary setting) Once this setting is enabled on the master station, integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station.

Access to link devices During a link refresh, data are assured for each station as shown below.

Select the check box.

CC-Link IE Field Network Board

Driver Link device

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 3

Station No. 4

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Station No. 3

Station No. 4

Link refresh

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission 65

5

Input status of data link faulty station setting Input data from the data link faulty station can be either cleared or held with the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Setting method Input status of data link faulty station can be set in the "Network Operation Setting". (Page 104 Network operation setting)

Input data Range where the settings are enabled Input status in case of failure RX and RY Master station RX

Local station RX and RY (only the input data from other stations) Clearing or holding the input data can be selected.

RWw and RWr Master station RWr Local station RWw and RWr (only the input data from other stations)

The input data are held regardless of any setting.

RX RX RY RY

RY

RWw

RWr RWr

RWw

RY RX RX

RWr RWr

RWw RWw

Area for which "Clear" or "Hold" can be selected in the data link faulty station input status setting

Area where data are held regardless of the setting

Area that is dependent on the setting of the intelligent device station

Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Master station (Board)

Intelligent device station

Local station Local station

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.3

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

66 5 FUNCTIONS 5.2 Cyclic Transmission

Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations, cyclic transmission can be stopped (Data reception from the slave stations and data transmission from the own station can be stopped). The stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted. Transient transmission is not stopped.

The link start/stop is not available in loop test mode. Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW).

(Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List, Page 199 Link Special Register (SW) List)

Setting method Cyclic transmission stop and restart are operated on the "Link Start/Stop" screen. (Page 131 Link start/stop)

When the board is reset or the system is powered OFF and then ON Even if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop, it will be restarted by resetting the board or powering OFF and then ON the system.

Stations to which the link start cannot be executed The link start cannot be executed to the following stations. Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error Station where link was stopped by a command from another station*1

Station where link was stopped by link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW)*1

*1 Selecting "Forced Link Start" will start the link.

RX,RWr

RX,RWr

RX,RWr

RX,RWr

RY,RWw

RY,RWw

RY,RWw RY,RWw

Personal computer

User program

Driver Link refresh

Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.3

Slave stationSlave stationSlave station

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Cyclic transmission stopped

Master station (Board)

5 FUNCTIONS 5.3 Transient Transmission 67

5

5.3 Transient Transmission This function allows communication with other stations, using the MELSEC data link library function. Communication is also possible with different networks.

Communication on the same network Using MELSEC data link library, the programmable controllers of other stations and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module installed with the head module can be accessed. (Page 137 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY)

Setting method Use the MELSEC data link library function. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

Transient transmission range It is possible to communicate with all stations on the network.

68 5 FUNCTIONS 5.3 Transient Transmission

Communication with different networks Setting the routing parameters in utility beforehand enables transient transmission to stations on different networks. Seamless communication is also possible with the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H.

Setting method For Routing parameters, set on the "Routing Information Setting" (Page 108 Routing parameters)

Transient transmission range For Multiple network system, communication with a station on up to the eighth network is possible by setting routing parameters.

Set the communication route by routing parameters in advance.

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Network No.1

(Relay station) Network No.2

CC-Link IE Field Network

(Relay station 1) (Relay station 2) (Relay station 3) CPU

module CPU

module CPU

module

(Relay station 4)

Network No.1

(Relay station 5)

(Relay station 6)

(Relay station 7)

(Relay station 8)

Network No.2 Network No.3 Network No.4

Network No.5

Network No.6

Network No.7

Network No.8Network No.9

Board

CC-Link IE Field Network

Own station

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

CPU module

5 FUNCTIONS 5.4 SEND/RECV Function 69

5

5.4 SEND/RECV Function The SEND/RECV function sends/receives data to/from other station's programmable controller using the MELSEC data link library function. (Page 137 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY)

Availability by the SW1DNC-CCIEF-B version For CC-Link IE Field Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are '15102' or higher, install SW1DNC-CCIEF- B version 1.04E or later. When using SW1DNC-CCIEF-B version 1.03D or earlier, one of the following error occurs in the SEND/RECV function and the function cannot be used. SEND function: Board driver I/F error :103 (0067H) RECV function: Timeout error :2 (0002H) For an error occurred, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual : Applicable, : Not applicable:

Channel (use for dedicated instruction) A channel is an area of a CC-Link IE Field Network board where data handled by a SEND/RECV function is stored. By using multiple channels, it is possible to simultaneously access from the own station to other stations or concurrently read from and write to the same board.

Number of channels The CC-Link IE Field Network board has 2 channels that can be used for SEND/RECV function. By using 2 channels simultaneously, the sending and receiving of two data can be executed at the same time.

Precautions When executing the sending and receiving of multiple data simultaneously by SEND/RECV function, make sure that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated. The sending and receiving for which the same channel is specified cannot be executed simultaneously. To use the same channel for multiple sending and receiving, execute one after completion of another.

Example When accessing from the own station to multiple other stations simultaneously

Change the channel used for the own station for each target station.

When accessing mutually between the own station and another station Change the channel used for the own station for each sending and receiving of data.

Serial number Version of SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

1.03D or earlier 1.04E or later '14052' or lower

15102 or higher

SEND

SEND

RECV

RECVChannel 1: For send

Channel 2: For send

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 1

Station No.0 (Own station)

Station No.1 (Other station)

Station No.2 (Other station)

SEND

SENDRECV

RECVChannel 1: For send

Channel 2: For receive

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1: For receive

Channel 2: For send

Station No.0 (Own station)

Station No.1 (Other station)

70 5 FUNCTIONS 5.4 SEND/RECV Function

SEND function The SEND function sends data from the own station to the specified channel of the specified station using the mdSend/ mdSendEx function of MELSEC data link library function.

When sending data to the same channel of the target station Send the data after the target station has been read the specified channel data. An error will be occurred if sending the data to the same channel of the target station before reading the specified channel data.

When the multiple network modules are mounted on the target station Specify the station number and network number of the network module which is received the request from the own station. The following example specifies the station number 1 of the network number 1. (The station number 5 of the network number 2 cannot be specified.)

main() {

mdOpen( 181, -1, &path );

mdSendEx( path, 1, 1, , );

mdClose( path ); }

RECV

[Target station][Own station]

User application Board Target station CPU module

SEND function

Channel 1 Channel 1

Channel 2 Channel 2

main() {

mdOpen( 181, -1, &path ); mdSendEx( path, 1, 1, , ); mdSendEx( path, 1, 1, , );

mdClose( path ); }

RECV

[Own station] [Target station]

User application Board Target station CPU module

Error

Channel 1 Channel 1

Channel 2 Channel 2

(Own station) Station No.0

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.5

Station No.3

Station No.2

Network No.1 Network No.2 Specify station No.1 as the target station. Station No.5 cannot be specified.

(Target station)

5 FUNCTIONS 5.4 SEND/RECV Function 71

5

Execution type Two execution types, "with arrival confirmation" and "without arrival confirmation", are available for the SEND function. When sending data with "without arrival confirmation" execution type, "All stations" and "Group numbers" can be specified as target stations besides the station number. Without arrival confirmation (When the target station is on the same network)

The process is completed when data is sent from the own station.

Without arrival confirmation (When the target station is on another network) The process is completed when data arrives at the relay station on the same network.

With arrival confirmation The process is completed when data is stored in the specified channel of target station.

When "Without arrival confirmation" is specified, the result is regarded as normal on the own station even if the sending to the target station fails as follows. When communication ends normally even though sent data are abnormal When data cannot be stored in the target station, because data is sent to the same station from multiple

stations

RECV function The RECV function reads data received from the other station using the mdReceive/mdReceiveEx function of MELSEC data link library function.

Target station

Completed

Request source

Target station

Completed

Relay stationRequest source

Target station

Completed

Relay station

Completed

Target station

Request source

main() {

mdOpen( 181, -1, &path );

mdReceiveEx( path, 0, 255, , );

mdClose( path ); }

SEND

[Send source] [Own station]

CPU module Target station Board User application

Channel 1

Channel 2 Channel 2

Channel 1

RECV function

72 5 FUNCTIONS 5.4 SEND/RECV Function

Reception buffer of RECV function Reception buffer of RECV function is a function in which a driver executes the RECV instruction automatically and received data are stored to reception buffers of each channel number in the driver. Set the Reception buffer of RECV function in the "driver setting" of the network parameter. (Page 106 Driver setting) "Without setting"

When the reception buffer is not set, the operation is the same as the RECV function of link dedicated instruction for CPU. This setting is used for detecting errors in sent data, whose execution type of the SEND function is set to "with arrival confirmation", at sending side.

"With setting" When the reception buffer is set, the operation is the same as the RECV function for MELSECNET/H board or CC-Link IE Controller Network board. This setting is used for receiving data from multiple stations such as data sampling.

When the reception buffer is set, an error may occur under the following condition.

Data received from other stations is stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source. The driver executes the RECV instruction automatically and stores the received data to reception buffers of each channel number from the storage channel of the target station. A maximum of 128 reception data are stored to each reception buffer of each channel number in the driver. When received data exceeds 128, the driver discards the received data automatically. Using the mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function, data of the specified channel number are read from the reception buffer in the order they were received.

Condition Description Corrective action Data are read immediately after the send data completion at the sending station.

When attempting data read by executing the mdReceive/mdReceiveEx function immediately after the send data completion at the sending station, "No reception data error" occurs because data have not yet been stored to the reception buffer of the driver.

Retry it after a little while.

Data are sent consecutively from the sending station.

When attempting data send consecutively, "Channel busy (dedicated instruction) error" occurs at the sending station because the channel is being used by the driver and thus the sent data cannot be received.

Retry it after a little while. Change the storage channel of the

target station.

Normally completed data at the sending side are discarded.

When 128 received data are stored to the reception buffer of each channel number, the 129th and the following received data are discarded automatically by the driver after they are received by the board and before they are stored to the reception buffer. When the data, whose execution type is set to "with arrival confirmation", are sent from the sending side, a normal completion is established at the sending side because the board receives data once, however, data are discarded.

Retry it after a little while.

main() {

mdOpen( 181, -1, &path );

mdReceiveEx( path, 0, 255, , );

mdClose( path ); }

SEND

Reception buffer of channel 1

Reception buffer of channel 2

First data Second data

127th data 128th data

First data Second data

127th data 128th data

[Send source] [Own station]

CPU module Target station Board Driver User application

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 2

RECV instruction

RECV function

5 FUNCTIONS 5.4 SEND/RECV Function 73

5

Event notification The event notification can be set to receive in the user program when receiving data. The event notification is set in the event setting of the network parameter. (Page 104 Event setting)

Received data can be obtained as events in a user program by specifying event numbers set in the event setting using the mdWaitBdEvent function. (The received data are read by executing the mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function after the return of the mdWaitBdEvent function.)

When setting the event notification function, set "Without setting" for Reception buffer of RECV function.

Operational change according to the setting of the RECV function RECV execution request flag When receiving data from another station, the RECV execution request flag status of link special relay (Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List) is set as follows according to each setting.

When data are not received at the execution of mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function The action when data are not received at the execution of mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function is set as follows according to each setting.

Messages received from other stations are stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source. Specified events are notified and the mdWaitBdEvent function completes normally. At this time, the received channel number is stored to the detailed event information of the mdWaitBdEvent function. Data of channel number notified by the mdWaitBdEvent function are read from the reception buffer using the mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function.

Reception buffer of RECV function

Event setting of channel that received data

RECV execution request flag when data from another station are received (SB0030, SB0031)

With setting (Event setting is not applicable.) No change

Without setting With event setting

Without event setting Flag turns ON

Reception buffer of RECV function

Event setting of channel that received data

Operation status of mdReceiveEx/mdReceive function

With setting (Event setting is not applicable.) The function ends with an error. (No reception data error)Without setting With event setting

Without event setting The function waits for up to the time specified for "Transient timeout monitoring time". (Page 106 Driver setting) When data are received: The function ends normally. When data are not received: The function ends with an error. (Response timer timeout (dedicated instruction))

mdWaitBdEvent( path, eventno, ); mdReceiveEx( path, 0, 255, , );

SEND

[Send source] [Own station]

CPU module Target station Board User application

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 2

Event notification

RECV function

74 5 FUNCTIONS 5.5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function

5.5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function

Reserved station specification allows setting of a station that is not actually connected at present but will be connected to the network in the future (must be included in the total number of stations for the network). Reserved stations are not detected as error stations even though they are not actually connected. When the reserved station function is disabled, a slave station specified as a reserved station can be canceled temporarily.

Reserved station specification A slave station can be specified as a reserved station in the "Network Configuration Setting". (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

Reserved station function disable and cancel This is used when connecting a reserved-status slave station to the network. Reserved station function disable and cancel is set on "Reserved Station Function Enable" screen. (Page 134 Reserved station function enable)

(Not actually connected.)

Master station (Station No.0)

Slave station (Station No.1)

Slave station (Station No.2)

Slave station (Station No.3)

Network Configuration Setting

Select "Reserved Station".

Reserved station

5 FUNCTIONS 5.6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function 75

5

5.6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function

When a slave station is set as an error invalid station, even if it is disconnected from the network during data link, the master station will not detect it as error station. Furthermore, by the temporary error invalid station setting function, a slave station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station.

Error invalid station setting A slave station can be set as an error invalid station in "Network Configuration Setting".(Page 101 Network configuration setting)

Temporary error invalid station This function is useful for various operations such as replacing a slave station during a data link by temporarily setting it as an error invalid station. For setting temporary error invalid station, refer to the following section. Page 135 Enable/Disable ignore station errors

Master station (Station No.0)

Slave station (Station No.1)

Slave station (Station No.2)

Slave station (Station No.3)

Network Configuration Setting

Select "Invalid Station".

Error invalid station No data link error will be detected on this station even in the case of an error or power OFF.

76 5 FUNCTIONS 5.7 Event Function

5.7 Event Function This function checks event conditions every link scan, and notifies events to the user program when the event conditions are met. By using the event function, the link devices can be monitored efficiently without reading link devices regularly by the user program.

Setting method Event conditions are set on the "Event setting" screen. (Page 104 Event setting) Specify event numbers set by the mdWaitBdEvent function of MELSEC data link library.

Set the event condition. Link devices set for the event condition are checked every link scan. When the event conditions are met, an event notification is issued every link refresh cycle. Page 106 Driver setting Receive the event notification using the mdWaitBdEvent function in the user program.

main(){ mdOpen(181, -1, &path); mdWaitBdEvent(path, eventno, );

mdClose(path); }

Personal computer Board

Event notification

Setting of event condition

User program

Receive the event notification using the mdWaitBdEvent function.

Conditions met

Event condition check

Link device (RX/RY/RWw/RWr) change

Network status (SB/SW) change

Data reception status of specified channel (RECV)

Data reception

Channel 1 Channel 2

5 FUNCTIONS 5.8 Loopback Function 77

5

5.8 Loopback Function The loopback disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally. Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link.

Setting method Configure the network in ring topology and set "Use" for "Loopback Function Setting" on the "Supplementary Setting" screen in "Network Configuration Setting". (Page 102 Supplementary setting)

Precautions For network topology other than ring topology, clear the check box. If the loopback function setting and the network configuration are inconsistent, an error may occur in all stations and data link cannot be performed.

Whether loopback is being performed or not can be checked by link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) for the master station. (Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List, Page 199 Link Special Register (SW) List)

Ring topology

Line topology

Error

Error

If an error occurs, the system will loopback data, continuing data link.

Stations after the error station are disconnected.

Select the check box.

78 5 FUNCTIONS 5.9 Driver WDT function

5.9 Driver WDT function The driver WDT function monitors the operation of the software (operating system, driver) using the timer function on CC-Link IE Field Network board. When the driver cannot reset the timer of the board within the specified driver WDT monitoring time, CC-Link IE Field Network board detects driver WDT error. Driver WDT function detects driver operation delay due to the access error from the driver to CC-Link IE Field Network board or system high load.

Driver WDT settings For the setting methods, refer to the following section. Page 106 Driver setting

The driver WDT function is set to invalid as a default.

When the driver WDT error has occurred The following shows the operation when driver WDT error has occurred. CC-Link IE Field Network board and the driver stop communication and are disconnected from the network in order to

avoid an erroneous output. When the Driver WDT function confirmed the CC-Link IE Field Network board in which a driver WDT error is occurred from other station, a CPU stop error occurs.

RUN LED flicks and RD. LED turns ON on the CC-Link IE Field Network board. "-28158 (9202H) Driver WDT error" occurs when accessing CC-Link IE Field Network board from the application program

in which the CC IE Field Utility and MELSEC data link library function are used.

When the multiple application programs in which MELSEC data link library is used are executed, driver WDT error is returned to all the programs. However, only the CC-Link IE Field Network board in which the driver WDT error has occurred is recognized as an error station on the network. When using driver WDT function, set the monitoring time considering the margin of the personal computer load. For the troubleshooting, refer to the following chapter. Page 141 TROUBLESHOOTING

6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6.1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions 79

6

6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES

This chapter explains the software package installation and uninstallation.

6.1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions The following are the precautions when installing and uninstalling the software package. Log on as a user with administrator authority. Make sure to close other applications running on Windows (including resident software such as antivirus software) before

installation and uninstallation. The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies' software such

as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically. Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically.

Check if the display settings on the [Device Manager] of Windows are correct, then install an appropriate display driver, or update the Windows.

The language switching function of the operating system set by "Regional and Language Options" on the Control Panel screen is not supported. The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed.

Enable the .NET Framework 3.5 (including .NET 2.0 or 3.0) in "Turn Windows features on or off" on the control panel. A network drive cannot be specified as the installation destination. When the parameters have been set with the utility installed, the parameters are initialized at installation. Save the

parameters with the save file function before installing the utility. When the software package has been installed in the environment that the creation of 8.3 filename is disabled, the software

package may not be uninstalled. Enable the creation of 8.3 filename before installing the software package. For the method on how to check and change the status of 8.3 filename creation to enable/disable, refer to the website of Microsoft Corporation.

When using SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.10L or later, apply Service Pack1 and Security Update for Windows (KB3033929) to Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2.

To Windows Server 2016, apply Windows Updates (KB4132216, KB4091664, KB4465659, and KB4480977). When installing the software package, enable "User Account Control: Detect application installations and prompt for

elevation" in 'Local Security Policy' in Windows. When the version of software package to be installed is Ver.1.17T or later, the software package the version of which is

Ver.1.16S or earlier must be uninstalled in advance.

80 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6.2 Installation

6.2 Installation The following explains a procedure for installing the software package.

Obtaining the software Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Installation procedure 1. Save the obtained data for installation to the system drive, CD-ROM, etc.

2. Start the installer. Double-click "Setup.exe" in the folder.

3. By following the on-screen instructions, select or enter the necessary information. Refer to the following section when the screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed. Page 145 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation

4. Restart the personal computer.

When installation is completed normally When the installation is completed normally, the following utilities etc. are registered.

Utilities and manuals When the installation is completed normally, the utilities and the manual shown below are registered in the "Start"*1 of Windows. *1 [Start screen] [All apps] or [Start] [All Programs]

*2 It is displayed when using Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2. *3 When the MELSEC Data Link Function HELP and a manual are registered both, refer to the manual.

Folder Name Description [MELSEC] [CC IE Field Board]*2

CC IE Field Utility (Board) Starts CC IE Field Utility. It is a utility to set boards and display the status.

CC IE Field Board Program Sample A folder in which sample programs are stored.

CC IE Field Board Manual Displays this manual.

[MELSEC] Device Monitor Utility (Board) Starts Device Monitor Utility. It is a utility to monitor devices and change the current value.

MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual (Board)*3

Displays MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual.

Name SW0DNC-MNETH-B SW1DNC-CCBD2-B SW1DNC-MNETG-B SW1DNC-CCIEF-B MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual (Board)

27D or later 1.15R or later 1.17T or later 1.06G or later

MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 23Z to 26C 1.11M to 1.14Q 1.12N to 1.16S 1.02C to 1.05F

MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 22Y or earlier 1.10L or earlier 1.11M or earlier

6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6.2 Installation 81

6

For the function and handling method, refer to the manual of the installed software package. The corresponding user's manual is stored in the 'Manual' folder of the software package.

In order to view the manuals, Adobe Reader is required. Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site.

When using 64-bit version operating system, the icon may not be displayed even when Adobe Reader is installed.

MELSEC Data Link Library MELSEC data link library is used for the following software packages in common. When the utilities are installed on the same personal computer, the newer MELSEC data link library of the software package is enabled. SW0DNC-MNETH-B SW1DNC-CCBD2-B SW1DNC-MNETG-B SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

Driver When installing the board on the personal computer after the installation of the software package, the driver is installed automatically. When the driver installation is completed normally, the following driver is displayed on the Device Manager screen of Windows.

Service application To prevent a personal computer from entering the power save mode (hibernate, sleep), MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically. For details of MELSECPowerManager, refer to the following section. Page 231 MELSECPowerManager

Device name Driver name MELSEC CC-Link IE Field Device MELSEC CC-Link IE Field Controller

82 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6.3 Uninstallation

When installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or failed, take corrective actions following the troubleshooting. Page 144 Installation failed

6.3 Uninstallation This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package.

Uninstallation procedure 1. Uninstall the software package from the control panel of Windows.

If a screen confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation Select "No to All". If deleting common files, other applications may not operate normally.

If a screen confirming the execution of restart appears at the completion of uninstallation Select "Yes, I want to restart my computer now.", and restart the personal computer.

MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation state which affects the other installed software packages. For details of MELSECPowerManager, refer to the following section.

Page 231 MELSECPowerManager

When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally, the icons registered in the Windows Start are deleted.

When uninstallation is failed When the uninstallation is failed, take corrective actions following the troubleshooting. Page 144 Uninstallation failed

7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 7.1 Overview 83

7

7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY CC IE Field Utility is software to display settings and status of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. For installing and uninstalling the CC IE Field utility, refer to the following section. Page 79 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES

7.1 Overview Use CC IE Field Utility to perform the following functions.

Item Description Menu Reference Test before wiring

Bus I/F test Check the hardware of the Bus I/F function of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

[Diagnostics] [Board Diagnostics]

Page 46 Bus I/F test

Memory test Check the memory of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 46 Memory test

Hardware test Check the hardware in the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 47 Hardware test

Self-loopback test Test the hardware of the CC-Link IE Field Network board alone, including the send/receive circuit of the transmission system and cables.

Page 48 Self-loopback test

Setting Parameter Setting Set the network parameters. [View] [Network Parameter]

Page 98 SETTING PARAMETERS

[Online] [Read from Board]/[Write to Board]

Page 113 Writing/ Reading Parameters to/ from Board

Channel number setting

Set channel numbers of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. [Online] [Channel No. Setting]

Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers

Test after wiring

Loop test Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each station.

[Diagnostics] [Board Diagnostics]

Page 53 Loop test

Cable test Check disconnections and incomplete connections of Ethernet cables.

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics]

Page 54 Cable test

Communication test Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from the own station to the target station is correct.

Page 55 Communication test

Monitor/ Debug

Device monitor Start Device Monitor Utility and monitor devices. [Online] [Device Monitor Utility]

Page 115 MONITORING

CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

Check error locations, error causes, and event histories. [Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics]

Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Reset operation Reset the board. [Online] [Reset Operation]

Page 114 Resetting Board

84 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 7.2 Menu List

7.2 Menu List This section explains functions of CC IE Field Utility.

[Project] Reference [New] Creates a new project. Page 91 Creating Projects

[Open] Opens an existing project. Page 92 Opening Existing Projects

[Close] Closes an open project. Page 96 Closing Projects

[Save] Saves a project. Page 93 Saving Projects

[Save As] Names and saves a project.

[Compress/Unpack] [Compress] Compresses and saves a project. Page 94 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects [Compress/Unpack] [Unpack] Unpacks a compressed project.

[Delete] Deletes an existing project. Page 96 Deleting Projects

[Verify] Verifies data of an open project and data of other projects. Page 97 Verifying Project Data

[(The latest file 1 to 4)] Displays the recently used CC IE Field Utility project paths and opens the selected project.

[Exit] Exits CC IE Field Utility. Page 85 Starting and Exiting

[Edit] Reference [Cut] Cuts the selected data.

[Copy] Copies the selected data.

[Paste] Pastes the cut or copied data at the cursor position.

[View] Reference [Network Parameter] Sets the network parameters. Page 98 SETTING PARAMETERS

[Toolbar] [(Toolbar name)] Displays/hides the toolbar. Page 87 Toolbars

[Online] Reference [Channel No. Setting] Displays/changes board channel numbers. Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers

[Read from Board] Reads parameters from the board. Page 113 Writing/Reading Parameters to/ from Board [Write to Board] Writes parameters to the board.

[Verify with Board] Verifies parameters set to the board and parameters of open project.

Page 114 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project

[Reset Operation] Resets the board. Page 114 Resetting Board

[Device Monitor Utility] Starts Device Monitor Utility. Page 115 MONITORING

[Diagnostics] Reference [Board Diagnostics] Diagnoses the operating status of the board. Page 117 Diagnosing Board

[CC IE Field Diagnostics] Diagnoses the CC-Link IE Field Network. Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

[Window] Reference [Cascade] Tiles windows in overlapping display.

[Tile Vertically] Tiles windows vertically.

[Tile Horizontally] Tiles windows horizontally.

[Arrange Icons] Arranges the icons at the bottom of the window.

[Close All] Closes all open windows.

[(Window information being displayed)] Displays the open window.

[Window] Displays a list of open windows. And opens and arranges specified windows.

Page 88 Work windows

[Help] Reference [Manual] Displays the manual. Page 90 Help Function

[About] Displays product information such as the version.

8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.1 Starting and Exiting 85

8

8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of CC IE Field Utility.

8.1 Starting and Exiting This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting CC IE Field Utility.

Starting up Start up CC IE Field Utility.

Operating procedure 1. Select [MELSEC] [CC IE Field Board]*2 [CC IE Field Utility (Board)] from Windows Start*1. *1 Select [All apps] on the Start screen or [Start] [All Programs]. *2 It is displayed when using Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2.

Starting CC IE Field Utility when the user account control is validated When CC IE Field Utility is started while user account control (UAC) is validated, the following warning screen is displayed. Click the "Allow (A)" or [Yes] button to start the utility.

For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed, refer to the following section. Page 225 Windows Warning Message

Exiting Exit CC IE Field Utility.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Project] [Exit]

86 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of CC IE Field Utility that is displayed when it is started up.

Main frame configuration The following shows a main frame configuration.

Window

Displayed items

Name Description Reference Title bar Displays a project name.

Menu bar Displays menu options for executing each function.

Toolbar Displays tool buttons for executing each function. Page 87 Toolbars

Work window A main screen used for operations such as parameter setting, and monitoring. Page 88 Work windows

Work window

Toolbar Menu bar

Title bar

8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations 87

8

Toolbars A toolbar is a block of on-screen buttons for executing frequently-used functions included in a menu. The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user.

Displaying/hiding toolbars Select a toolbar to be displayed.

Operating procedure 1. Select [View] [Toolbar] [(toolbar name)] The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen.

Switching the Docking/floating of toolbars Switch the display format (docking/floating) of a toolbar.

Floating a toolbar Displays a toolbar floating from the main frame.

Operating procedure 1. Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display.

Docking a toolbar Displays a toolbar docked to the main frame.

Operating procedure 1. Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame.

Method for docking a toolbar at the original position To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position, double-click on the title bar of the toolbar.

Drag and drop

Drag and drop

88 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Customizing toolbars This function sets the types of tool buttons to be displayed in each toolbar.

Operating procedure 1. Select ( button) [Add or Remove Buttons] of Toolbar. A list of tool buttons is displayed.

2. Check the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen. The checked tool buttons are displayed on the screen.

The toolbar configuration returns to the default when [Reset Toolbar] is selected.

Work windows A work window is a main screen used for operations such as parameter setting and monitoring in CC IE Field Utility.

Window

Work window switching button

Scroll buttonTool hintTab

8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations 89

8

Displayed items

Arranging/displaying windows Displays a list of open windows. And opens and arranges specified windows. This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open.

Window

[Window] [Window]

Item Description Tab The tab becomes active when selected.

The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs. The window(s) can be closed from the menu displayed by right-clicking the tab. In addition, the active window can be closed by clicking [] button on the tab.

Tool hint Displays a brief explanation when the cursor is moved onto the selected tab.

Scroll button Scroll the tab display to the left and right. Displays hidden tabs.

Work window switching button Displays a list of open windows. Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top.

Display windows Display screens such as the "Network Parameter Setting the Number of CC IE Field Cards" screen.

Right click

90 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8.3 Help Function

8.3 Help Function

Displaying manuals Displays the manual of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Help] [Manual]

Checking version of CC IE Field Utility Displays information such as the software version of CC IE Field Utility.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Help] [About]

9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.1 Creating Projects 91

9 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT This chapter explains basic operations of CC IE Field Utility such as creating, opening, and saving projects.

9.1 Creating Projects Create a new project.

Window

[Project] [New]

Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the CC-Link IE Field Network board when data are read from the board before creating a new project. (Page 113 Writing/Reading Parameters to/from Board)

A note on creating a new project Do not change the storage location or file name of created workspace or project folder/file using an application such as Windows Explorer.

92 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.2 Opening Existing Projects

9.2 Opening Existing Projects Read a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

Window

[Project] [Open]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Open] button. The specified project is displayed.

Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name. Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer.

Network drive display on the "Browse For Folder" screen When the network drive display is not displayed, log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder.

Item Description Save Folder Path Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

The folder can be selected in the "Browse For Folder" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

Workspace/Project List Select a workspace. The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".

Workspace Name A selected workspace name is displayed.

Project Name A selected project name is displayed.

Title The title of the selected project is displayed.

[Browse] button Displays the "Browse For Folder" screen.

9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.3 Saving Projects 93

9 9.3 Saving Projects Save a project in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

Saving projects under the specified name Save the open project under the specified name.

Window

[Project] [Save As]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

*1 Enter each workspace name, project name, and title within 128 characters. Note, however, that the total number of characters used for the workspace folder path, workspace name, and project name should not exceed 150 characters.

2. Click the [Save] button. The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name, project name, and title.

Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name. Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer.

Saving projects in an existing destination When saving a project in an existing destination (workspace or project), the destination folder can be selected from the "Workspace/Project List".

Network drive display on the "Browse For Folder" screen When the network drive display is not displayed, log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder.

Item Description Save Folder Path Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

The folder can be selected in the "Browse For Folder" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

Workspace/Project List Select a workspace. The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".

Workspace Name*1 Enter the workspace name.

Project Name*1 Enter the project name.

Title*1 Enter the title of the project.

94 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects

Saving projects Overwrite and save the project being edited.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Project] [Save] The existing project data are overwritten.

9.4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects

This section explains the methods for saving projects with compression, and unpacking projects saved with compression. This function gives easier project data passes. This function is not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression tools.

Saving projects with compression Save a desired project with compression.

Window

[Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Compress]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Compress] button. The compressed project file (*.ifz) is saved in the specified folder.

Item Description Project to be Compressed Workspace Folder Path Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

The folder can be selected in the "Browse For Folder" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

Workspace/Project List Select a workspace and a project.

Workspace Name A selected workspace name is displayed.

Project Name A selected project name is displayed.

Compress Destination Setting Compressed File Name Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved and the compressed file name. The compressed file name can be set in the "Compressed File Name" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects 95

9 Unpacking projects saved with compression Unpack a project saved with compression.

Window

[Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Unpack]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Unpack] button. The compressed project file is unpacked and saved in the specified folder.

Item Description Unpack Source Setting Compressed File Name Enter the folder (drive/path) in which the compressed file to be unpacked is saved,

and the compressed file name. The compressed file name can be selected in the "Compressed File Name" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

Unpack Destination Project Workspace Folder Path Enter the folder (drive/path) to which the project to be unpacked is saved. The folder can be selected in the "Browse For Folder" screen by clicking the [Browse] button.

Workspace/Project List Select a workspace and a project.

Workspace Name Enter the name of the workspace to which the unpacked project is saved.

Project Name Enter the name of the project to which the unpacked project is saved.

[Unpack and Open] button Unpacks the compressed project file and opens the project.

96 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.5 Deleting Projects

9.5 Deleting Projects This section explains a method for deleting a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Project] [Delete] The "Delete Project" screen is displayed.

2. Select the project to be deleted.

3. Click the [Delete] button. The selected project is deleted.

9.6 Closing Projects This section explains a method for closing an open project.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Project] [Close]

9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9.7 Verifying Project Data 97

9 9.7 Verifying Project Data This section explains a method for verifying data of an open project and data of another project. Use this function to check if the data of the projects are the same, or to check the changed parameter locations. To verify data in the board, perform board verification. (Page 114 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project)

Window

[Project] [Verify]

Operating procedure 1. Click the [Browse] button to set the verify destination project.

2. Click the [Execute] button. The verify result is displayed in the "Verify Result" screen.

Item Description Verify Destination Project Workspace Folder Path The path to the workspace of a verify destination is displayed.

Workspace Name A workspace name is displayed.

Project Name The project name of a verify destination is displayed.

Title The project title of a target project is displayed.

98 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.1 Parameter List

10 SETTING PARAMETERS This chapter explains the parameter setting items and operations on the setting screens in CC IE Field Utility. For writing set parameters to a board, refer to the following section. Page 113 Writing/Reading Parameters to/from Board

10.1 Parameter List The following table shows the list of CC-Link IE Field Network parameters. : Required, : Set as required, : No setting

When parameters are not set CC-Link IE Field Network board operates as a local station (station number 1) of network number 1 in the offline mode. In this case, only transient transmission is performed. (Cyclic transmission is not performed).

Item Necessity of setting Reference

Master station Local stations Network setting Network Type Page 99 Setting Network Parameter

Channel No.

Network No.

Total Stations

Station No.

Mode

Network Configuration Setting Station No. Page 101 Network configuration settingStation Type

RX/RY Setting

RWw/RWr Setting

Reserved/Error Invalid Station

Alias

Comment

Supplementary Setting

Network Operation Setting Page 104 Network operation setting

Event Setting Page 104 Event setting

Driver Setting Page 106 Driver setting

Target Setting Page 107 Target setting

Routing Parameters Page 108 Routing parameters

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 99

10

10.2 Setting Network Parameter Set the network number, station number, and other parameters for the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [End] button.

Item Description Network setting Network Type Select the network type. (Page 100 Network type and mode)

Channel No. Select the channel number.

Network No. Set the network number. Setting range: 1 to 239

Total Stations Set the total number of stations. Setting range: 1 to 120

Station No. Set the station number of the board. Setting range: Fixed to 0 for a master station, 1 to 120 for a local station

Mode Select the mode. (Page 100 Network type and mode)

Network Configuration Setting Display the "Network Configuration Setting" screen. (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

Network Operation Setting Display the "Network Operation Setting" screen. (Page 104 Network operation setting)

Event Setting Display the "Event Setting" screen. (Page 104 Event setting)

Driver Setting Display the "Driver Setting" screen. (Page 106 Driver setting)

Target Setting Display the "Target Setting" screen. (Page 107 Target setting)

[Routing Parameters] button Displays the "CC IE Field Routing Information Setting" screen. (Page 108 Routing parameters)

[Check] button Checks whether the settings are correct.

100 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

Network type and mode The following explains network types and modes of parameter.

Network type The following types can be selected.

Mode Selectable items for the mode are different depending on the network type.

Master station The following modes can be selected.

For the differences in cyclic transmission between "Online (Normal Mode)" and "Online (High Speed Mode)", refer to the following section. Page 218 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes

Local stations The following modes can be selected.

Item Description CC IE Field (Master Station) Use as a master station in the CC-Link IE Field Network.

CC IE Field (Local Station) Use as a local station in the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Item Description Online (Normal Mode) This mode performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission without losing their inherent speed performance.

This mode is suitable for a system that performs I/O control and analog control, and transmits large amount of data for management, monitoring, and diagnostics by transient transmission. Use this mode for general applications.

Online (High Speed Mode) This mode preferentially performs cyclic transmission for high-speed communications. This mode is suitable for a system to achieve I/O control, analog control, and digital I/O at high speed. Note that the maximum points assigned to RWw/RWr is 256 points per local station. In this mode, the processing speed of transient transmission is slower than that in "Online (Normal Mode)"

Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations.

Item Description Online Select this mode to connect the station to the network for performing data link with other stations.

Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations.

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 101

10

Network configuration setting Set parameters of slave stations (slave station points, link device assignment) to the master station, and set link scan mode and block data assurance per station. This setting is available when "CC IE Field (Master Station)" is selected in the network setting.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Network Configuration Setting"

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description Assignment Method Select an assignment method for send range of each station.

Number of PLCs Display the number of stations from 1 to total stations.

Station No. Set the station number. Setting range: 1 to 120

Station Type Select the station type.

RX/RY Setting Points Specify the number of relay points on the link side. Setting range: 16 to 2048 points for "Local Station" and "Intelligent Device Station" 16 to 128 points for "Remote Device Station", 16 to 64 points for "Remote I/O Station"

Start Specify the start point of relay on the link side. Setting range: 0 to 3FF0

End Specify the end point of relay on the link side. Setting range: F to 3FFF

RWw/RWr Setting Points Specify the number of registers on the link side. Setting range: 4 to 1024 points for "Local Station" and "Intelligent Device Station" 4 to 64 points for "Remote Device Station"

Start Specify the start point of register on the link side. Setting range: 0 to 1FFC

End Specify the end point of register on the link side. Setting range: 3 to 1FFF

Reserved/Error Invalid Station Set reserved stations and error invalid stations.

Alias Set the alias. Setting range: Up to 8 characters

Comment Set the comment. Setting range: Up to 32 characters

[Supplementary Setting] button Displays the "Supplementary Setting" screen. (Page 102 Supplementary setting)

[Equal Assignment] button Displays the "Equal Assignment" screen. (Page 103 Equal assignment)

[Identical Point Assignment] button Assigns the same link device points to all local stations. Enter the points in the field next to the button.

102 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

2. Click the [End] button.

Supplementary setting Set the link scan mode, loopback function, and block data assurance per station.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Network Configuration Setting" "Network Configuration Setting" screen [Supplementary Setting] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

*1 Link scan is executed 'asynchronously' with the link refresh which is executed by the CC-Link IE Field Network board driver.

2. Click the [End] button.

Link scan mode setting The constant link scan can be set by checking the check box. Set this item to perform cyclic transmission at constant intervals. Link scan will be performed by the interval set in this item. However, when the actual link scan time is longer than constant link scan time, cyclic transmission is performed by link scan time. While constant link scan is used to keep link scan time constant, the transmission delay time is not kept constant by this function. Set constant link scan in increments of 1ms.

[Clear] button Clears all settings.

[Check] button Checks whether the settings are correct.

Item Description Link Scan Mode Setting*1

Constant Link Scan Set this item to perform cyclic transmission at constant intervals. Link scan will be performed by the interval set in this item. Check the check box and set the constant link scan time. Setting range: 1 to 200

Loopback Function Setting Select whether to use the loopback function. (Page 77 Loopback Function) To configure a network in ring topology, select this check box.

Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure data integrity on a station basis in link refresh between the driver and the board.

Item Description

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 103

10

Equal assignment Equally assign link devices to local stations with preset conditions.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Network Configuration Setting" "Network Configuration Setting" screen [Equal Assignment] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [OK] button.

Item Description RX/RY Equal Assignment

Start Station Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned. Setting range: 1 to the end slave station number

End Station Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned. Setting range: Start station number to the end slave station number

Start No. Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned. Setting range: 0 to 3FF0

Total Points Assigned Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned. Setting range: 16 to (16384 - start number)

RWw/RWr Equal Assignment

Start Station Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned. Setting range: 1 to the end slave station number

End Station Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned. Setting range: Start station number to the end slave station number

Start No. Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned. Setting range: 0 to 1FFC

Total Points Assigned Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned. Setting range: 4 to (8192 - start number)

104 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

Network operation setting Set the parameter name and network operation at data link error.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Network Operation Setting"

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [End] button.

Event setting Set conditions to notify events to a user program.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Event Setting"

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description Parameter Name Set the parameter name of the "Network Operation Setting".

Setting range: Up to 8 characters

Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to hold or clear data input from the slave station where a data link error has occurred.

Item Description Input Format Set the format of the setting value.

Device Code*1 Set the link device name for the event condition.

Device No. Set the link device number for the event condition. Setting range: For link devices RX and RY: 0 to 3FFF For link devices SB and SW: 0 to 01FF For link devices RWw and RWr: 0 to 1FFF

Detection Method Set the detection method. (Page 105 Combination of detection method and event condition)

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 105

10

*1 When selecting "RECV Function", set "No Setting" for "RECV Function Reception Buffer" in the driver setting.

2. Click the [End] button.

Combination of detection method and event condition The following table shows results and events of the combination of detection method and event condition.

Event Condition Set the event condition. (Page 105 Combination of detection method and event condition)

Word Device Setting Value Set the word device setting value. DEC setting range: 0 to 65535 HEX setting range: 0000 to FFFF

Channel No. Set the channel number (use for dedicated instructions) . Setting range: 1 to 2

Event No. Set the event number. Setting range: 0 to 15

[Clear] button Clears all settings.

[Check] button Checks whether the settings are correct.

Device Detection Method Event Condition Description RX RY SB

Edge Detect ON An event occurs at the rising edge of the device.

OFF An event occurs at the falling edge of the device.

Level Detect ON An event occurs by turning ON the device.

OFF An event occurs by turning OFF the device.

RWw RWr SW

Edge Detect Equal An event occurs when values match. (First time only)

Unequal An event occurs when values do not match. (First time only)

Change An event occurs when values change. (First time only)

Level Detect Equal An event occurs when values match.

Unequal An event occurs when values do not match.

RECV Function Edge Detect An event occurs when a specified channel receives data.

Item Description

106 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

Driver setting Set the driver WDT monitoring time, transient timeout monitoring time, link refresh cycle, and RECV function reception buffer.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Driver Setting"

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

*1 Set "No Setting" when "RECV Function" is selected for the device code in the event setting.

2. Click the [End] button.

Item Description Driver WDT Monitoring Time Select "Use driver WDT function" to enable the function.

Set the driver WDT monitoring time. Setting range: 1 to 32767

Transient Timeout Monitoring Time Set the transient timeout monitoring time. Setting range: 1 to 360

Link Refresh Cycle Set the link refresh cycle. Setting range: 1 to 1000

RECV Function Reception Buffer*1 Set the RECV function reception buffer.

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 107

10

Target setting Set logical station numbers to access to multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system using the MELSEC data link library function.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen "Target Setting"

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [End] button.

Item Description Logical Station No. Set the logical station number.

Setting range: 0 to 239

Network No. Set the network number of the access target. Setting range: 1 to 239

Station No. Set the station number of the access target. Setting range: 0 to 120

Multiple PLC Set the access target CPU (CPU number in the multiple CPU system).

Redundant PLC Set the access target CPU (system specification for the redundant system).

[Clear] button Clears all settings.

[Check] button Checks whether the settings are correct.

108 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

Routing parameters Set communication paths for transient transmission between a station in the own network and stations in other networks.

Window

[View] [Network Parameter] "CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting" screen [Routing Parameters] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [End] button.

Item Description Target Network No. Set the target network number. Numbers cannot be overlapped.

Setting range: 1 to 239

Relay Network No. Set the first relay network number in the path to the target network. Setting range: 1 to 239

Relay Station No. Set the first relay station number in the path to the target network. Setting range: 0 to 120

Condition Setting of Relay/Target Network

Set whether MELSECNET/10 network is to be used for routing the network.

[Clear] button Clears all settings.

[Check] button Checks whether the settings are correct.

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 109

10

Target relay network For a relay station set in the routing parameter, set a relay station of the own network which is routed by the transient transmission.

Ex.

A setting to perform transient transmission to network number

*1 The stations, which routing parameter settings are not supported such as head modules, do not need to be set. The communication with other networks is made depending on the routing parameters set to the master station.

Transient transmission range Communications can be made with stations on up to the eighth network (the number of relay stations: 7).

To check whether routing parameters have been correctly set and transient transmission will be successfully performed, perform a communication test in CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 55 Communication test)

On a relay station in the multiple CPU system, when different control CPUs are set for the network modules Set the same routing parameters to all the control CPUs.

To go to network No. ,

Network No.

Network No.

(Relay station)

Station that needs routing parameters

No routing parameter setting is required for network No. because the module of network No. is mounted on the relay station.

station No. of its own network No. .

*1

Control CPU setting

Set the same routing parameters.

110 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter

Stations that need routing parameter settings Routing parameter settings are required for relay stations and a request source which performs transient transmission to other networks.

Ex.

A setting to perform transient transmission from the station number 2 on the network number 1 to the station number 4 on the network number 3

Master station (Request source) Station No.0

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.5

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

(Relay station 1) (Relay station 2)

Network No.2

Network No.3

(Request target)

Station No.4

Station No.4

Station No.5

Station No.3

CC-Link IE Field Network Network No.1

3 1 3

3 2 4

1 12

Station Transient transmission (request) Transient transmission (response)

Request source

Relay station 1

Relay station 2

Request target

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.3

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.4

Station No.4

Station No.4

Station No.5

Station No.5

Target Network No.

Relay Network No.

Relay Station No.

Transmit data through station No. 3 on network No. 1 to communicate with network No. 3.

Transmit data through station No. 4 on network No. 2 to communicate with network No. 3.

Passes data to the request target on network No.3.

Pass data to the request source on network No.1.

Transmit data through station No.1 on network No.2 to communicate with network No.1.

Pass data to the relay station automatically.

Target Network No.

Relay Network No.

Relay Station No.

Target Network No.

Relay Network No.

Relay Station No.

10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10.2 Setting Network Parameter 111

10

Setting for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks Routing parameters are not required for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks; however, setting the same routing parameters to all stations is recommended. Note that routing parameters need not to be set for stations for which routing parameters are not available (such as a station including a head module). The station communicates with other networks according to routing parameters set to the master station.

Station which does not perform transient transmission

Network No. (Relay station)

Network No.

It is recommended to set the same routing parameters as for . and can communicate by the same routing parameters, since they pass through the same relay station.

112 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11.1 Setting Board Channel Numbers

11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE This chapter explains a method for operating a board online using CC IE Field Utility.

11.1 Setting Board Channel Numbers This section explains a method for checking/setting board channel numbers.

Window

[Online] [Channel No. Setting]

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [End] button. "Channel No. Setting Value" is set to the board.

181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default. When using two or more boards in a single personal computer, set channel numbers not to overlap.

Item Description Channel No. Current Value Display current channel numbers of each board.

LED Display LED status of each board. The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the "Channel No.

Setting" screen.

Channel No. Setting Value Set the channel number to be changed.

<181> <182> <183> <184>

11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11.2 Writing/Reading Parameters to/from Board 113

11

11.2 Writing/Reading Parameters to/from Board This section explains methods for writing project parameter settings to the board and reading current board parameter settings to the project.

Operating procedure 1. Select [Online] [Read from Board]/[Write to Board]

Channel numbers Parameter settings to be written to the board are reflected to the board of the corresponding channel number. Change board channel numbers on the "Channel No. Setting" screen. (Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers)

Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the board when data are read from the board before creating a new project. (Page 91 Creating Projects)

Channel number 181 Channel number 182

Parameter setting of channel number 181

Parameter setting of channel number 182

114 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11.3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project

11.3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project This section explains a method for verifying parameters set to the board and parameters of open project. Use this function to check if the parameters of the projects are the same, or to check the changed parameter locations. To verify two projects, perform the project verification. (Page 97 Verifying Project Data)

Operating procedure 1. Select [Online] [Verify with Board] The verify result is displayed on the "Verify Result" screen.

11.4 Resetting Board This section explains a method for resetting the board from CC IE Field Utility.

Window

[Online] [Reset Operation]

Operating procedure 1. Check the check box of the board to be reset.

2. Click the [OK] button. The selected board is reset.

12 MONITORING 115

12

12 MONITORING This function is performed using Device Monitor Utility. For Device Monitor Utility, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

116 12 MONITORING

MEMO

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.1 Diagnosing Board 117

13

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS This chapter explains the methods for diagnosing the board or CC-Link IE Field Network status using CC IE Field Utility.

13.1 Diagnosing Board This section explains a method for checking the board status.

Window

[Diagnostics] [Board Diagnostics]

Displayed items

Item Description Monitor Status Displays current monitor status.

Board List Board No. Displays the board number of each board.

Channel No. Displays the channel number of each board.

Network No. Displays the network number set for each board.

Station No. Displays the station number set for each board.

Transmission Status Displays communication status of each board.

Latest Error Code Displays the latest error code of board.

Link Refresh Displays the maximum, minimum, and current time of link refresh.

Board Information Channel No. Select a board channel number of a test target or information display target.

Model Name Displays a model name of the selected board.

Product Information Displays product information of the selected board.

Board Test Executes a test on the selected board.

[Diagnostics] button Displays the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen)

118 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Operating procedure 1. Click the [Start Monitor] button and start monitoring. Click the [Stop Monitor] button to stop monitoring.

2. Set a board channel number of a test target or information display target.

3. Select a test mode for "Mode".

4. Click the [Start Test]button. Start the board test.

5. Result is displayed in the "Test result" field.

13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network This section explains a method for checking the CC-Link IE Field Network status of a selected board. Target station by CC IE Field Utility for the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is as follows.

Station type Board/Module Model name Master station/Local station CC-Link IE Field Network board Q80BD-J71GF11-T2

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Master/local module RJ71GF11-T2 RJ71EN71 QJ71GF11-T2 LJ71GF11-T2

Intelligent device station Head module LJ72GF15-T2

Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB

Remote device stations Input module NZ2GF2B1-16D

NZ2GFCE3-16D

NZ2GFCE3-16DE

NZ2GFCM1-16D

NZ2GFCM1-16DE

Output module NZ2GF2B1-16T

NZ2GF2B1-16TE

NZ2GFCE3-16T

NZ2GFCE3-16TE

NZ2GFCM1-16T

NZ2GFCM1-16TE

Analog input module/Analog output module NZ2GF2B-60AD4

NZ2GF2B-60DA4

Temperature control module NZ2GF2B-60TCTT4

NZ2GF2B-60TCRT4

High-speed counter module NZ2GFCF-D62PD2

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 119

13

Selecting the diagnostics target The following explains the target selection for CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. The entire network status can be checked by connecting CC IE Field Utility to a master station. However, when a local station status cannot be checked because of a failure such as a cable disconnection, connect the utility to a local station directly.

Selecting diagnostics target board When two or more CC-Link IE Field Network boards are installed to a personal computer, the "Select Diagnostics Destination" screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics. Select a board to be diagnosed and click the [OK] button.

Changing diagnostics target board To change a board to be diagnosed during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, click the [Change Board] button on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. The "Board Change" screen is displayed. Select a board to be diagnosed, and click the [OK] button.

Displaying diagnostics screen The following explains the diagnostics screen of CC-Link IE Field Network.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics]

Select Diagnostics Destination

Network Status

Network configuration

Operation Test

Information Confirmation/Set

Monitor Status

Disconnected station status monitor

Selected Station Communication Status Monitor

120 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Displayed items : Diagnosed, : Diagnosed with restrictions, : Not diagnosed

Starting from the "Board Diagnostics" screen CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics can also be started from the "Board Diagnostics" screen. (Page 117 Diagnosing Board)

Item Diagnostics target Restrictions Reference

Master station

Local station

Select Diagnostics Destination Page 122 Select diagnostics target

Monitor Status Page 122 Monitor status

Network Status, network configuration, Legends

Display of network configuration and error status

Page 122 Network status Page 123 Legends Page 124 Network configurationDisplay of disconnected

cable and disconnected station

Data link unperformed Disconnected station status monitor

Page 127 Disconnected station status monitor

Selected Station Communication Status Monitor

Display of selected station status and error details

The selected station status and error details are not displayed when using a module which is not supported by the selected station communication status monitor function of CC IE Field Utility.

Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor

Slave station number setting (Only for slave stations whose number has not been set.)

Operation Test Communication Test Page 129 Communication test

Cable Test Page 130 Cable test

Link Start/Stop For a local station, this function can only be performed on an own station.

Page 131 Link start/stop

Information Confirmation/ Set

Network Event History Events that can be collected differ according to the station type.

Page 132 Network event history

Reserved Station Function Enable

For a local station, reserved stations/temporary error invalid stations can only be displayed.

Page 134 Reserved station function enable

Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting/Restore

Page 135 Enable/Disable ignore station errors

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 121

13

Operating procedure 1. Select a station to be diagnosed from "Select Station" or "Network Status". (Page 122 Select diagnostics target, Page 124 Network configuration)

2. Status of a station selected in "Network Status" is displayed on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". (Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor)

The station status is displayed on the top of "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". If an error occurs, a button indicating the error (such as [Module Error] button) is displayed on the "Selected Station

Communication Status Monitor". Clicking the button allows checking of error details and corrective actions.

3. Various tests and operations can be performed from "Operation Test" and "Information Confirmation/Set" on the bottom left of the screen.

(Page 129 Communication test to Page 135 Enable/Disable ignore station errors)

Item Description Station where errors occurred , , or is displayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs.

Disconnected station The 'disconnected station' icon ( ) is displayed on the network configuration. For disconnected stations displayed on "Disconnected station status monitor", refer to the following section. Page 127 Disconnected station status monitor

Communication error is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs. To check the details of the communication error, click the neighboring stations of .

When the loopback function is disabled is displayed if the network is configured in ring topology.

When the loopback function is enabled is displayed if the network is configured in star topology.

When the network is incorrectly configured in ring topology is displayed.

Click the button to display the "Error details" screen.

122 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Select diagnostics target

Window

Displayed items

Selecting a target from "Network Status" A diagnostics target can also be selected from the network configuration of "Network Status".

Monitor status Display current monitor status.

Window

Displayed items

Network status

Window

Displayed items

Item Description Board Display the selected diagnostics target board and the network number.

Select Station Display the station number of the station selected in the network configuration. Set the station number to be selected.

[Change Board] button Displays the "Change Board" screen. (Page 119 Selecting the diagnostics target)

Item Description [Start Monitor] button Starts monitoring.

[Stop Monitor] button Stops monitoring.

Item Description Total Slave Stations Display the total number of slave stations, the link scan time (in units of ms), and the number of stations error

occurrences on the network being displayed.Current Link Scan Time

The Number of Stations Error Occurs

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 123

13

Legends Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen.

Window

Click the [Legends] button.

Station type display of the icon When modules other than the target of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics (Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network) are used in a local station, it is displayed as "Other Modules" ( ).

124 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Network configuration CC-Link IE Field Network configuration and status of each station are displayed. When the status of each station is not displayed, check if master stations or station numbers are not duplicated.

Window

Displayed items

Icon By clicking an icon, the station is set as a selected station and details are displayed in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". (A station with an error, such as master station duplication or station number duplication, details are not displayed as a selected station even by clicking the icon. In such case, execute the board diagnostics on the error station, and determine the error cause. When the error station is a module, determine the error cause using the system monitor function of GX Works2.) Use the right and left arrow keys to move the focus and press the or key to confirm the selected station. The same functions as the functions of "Operation Test" and "Information Confirmation/Set" can be executed from the menus displayed by right-clicking the icon.

The content of the displayed icons can be confirmed with the [Legends] button. (Page 123 Legends)

No. Item Description (1) Connected Station Indicates a station connected to the utility (own station).

(2) Network type Station No.

Displays a network type and station number. "?" is displayed when a station number has not been set. When the background of the characters is colored, setting such as reserved station specification has been configured to the relevant station.

(3) Icon Displays a module type and station status.

(4) Port Displays a port to which an Ethernet cable is connected.

(5) Divergence A branch of star topology configured by using a network device such as a hub.

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 125

13

When is displayed in "Network Status" Although the loopback function is disabled, the network is configured in ring topology. Perform the following measures. When not using the loopback function

Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network (either PORT1 or PORT2). The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start.

When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter to the board. (Page 77 Loopback Function) When a master/local module is used for the master station, check if the master/local module supports the loopback function. If the master/local module does not support the loopback function, replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function.

is displayed by any of the following causes.

Although the loopback function is disabled, the network is configured in ring topology. Although the loopback function is enabled, the network is configured in star topology. The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology. Perform the following measures. Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured. (Page 77 Loopback Function)

If incorrect, correct the network parameter and rewrite it to the board. When data link starts over the network, the action is successful.

When the loopback function is disabled, perform the following measures. Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power cycle the hub. (Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network.) When data link starts over the network, check the network configuration by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.

When the loopback function is enabled, perform the following measures. Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub. Connecting a switching hub will cause a problem such as data link failure. (Page 24 Configuration in which data link cannot be performed (incorrect ring topology)) When a master/local module is used for the master station, check if the master/local module supports the loopback function. If the master/local module does not support the loopback function, replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function.

126 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Display of network configuration Network configuration is displayed according to the connection status.

However, in the following cases, network configuration displayed in the network configuration screen differs from the actual configuration.

Network configuration Actual system configuration Network configuration Star topology

Line topology

Star and line mixed

Ring topology

Network configuration Actual system configuration Network configuration Two stations are connected through a switching hub.

Branches are not displayed in the network configuration display area.

Switching hubs are in cascade connection.

Only one branch is displayed.

Master station (Station No. 0) Switching hub

Intelligent device station (Station No. 3)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 4)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 5)

Master station (Station No. 0)

Local station (Station No. 1)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 2)

Master station (Station No. 0)

Connection to PORT1

Switching hubConnection to PORT2

Intelligent device station (Station No. 3)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 2)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 4)

Local station (Station No. 1)

Master station (Station No. 0)

Local station (Station No. 1)

Intelligent device station (Station No. 2)

Master station (Station No. 0) Switching hub

Intelligent device station (Station No. 1)

Master station (Station No.0) Switching hub Switching hub

Intelligent device station

(Station No. 1)

Intelligent device station

(Station No. 2)

Intelligent device station

(Station No. 3)

Intelligent device station

(Station No. 4)

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 127

13

Click the [Update] button to update the network configuration diagram as follows: When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is "17022" or higher, and if the network

configuration diagram on the diagnostic screen does not match with the actual network configuration, match it by updating the network configuration diagram. Whether mismatch is occurred or not can be checked using 'Network configuration mismatch occurrence status' (SB0098). (Page 26 When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17022' or higher)

When a serial number (first five digits) of the master station is "17021" or lower, delete the disconnected station displayed on the network configuration diagram. The disconnected station is displayed on "Disconnected station status monitor".

Disconnected station status monitor Displays a disconnected station that has been set in the network configuration settings but has not yet performed data link. However, even if a disconnected station has performed data link, it is displayed in this area in the following cases. A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection/insertion or power-OFF and power-ON of the system

and remains disconnected A station that was disconnected with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the [Update]

button

The icon indicates a station that has not yet performed data link. Icons other than indicate stations that had performed data link before disconnection.

Selected station communication status monitor Display status of the selected station.

Window

Disconnected station status monitor

(1) (3)

(5)

(2) (4)

Click the button to display the "Error details" screen.

(6)

128 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Displayed items

Specifying station number Specify a station number for the station number unspecified station when the connected station is a master station.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Station No. Setting] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [OK] button.

Adding a station set in "Network Configuration Setting" The external device on a slave station outputs data input from the master station, simultaneously with configuration of the station number setting. Therefore, set the CPU module to STOP or check that outputs from the external device will not cause a problem beforehand.

A station number is not specified to the slave station For a method for canceling the station number set to the slave station in the CC-Link IE Field Network Diagnostics, refer to the manual of slave station being used.

No. Item Description (1) Operating status Display the station number and operating status.

: Normal : Error (Data link is continued.) (yellow) : Error (Data link is stopped.) (red) : Station number is not specified. (red)

(2) Mode Display the mode. It is not displayed if a station number is not specified.

(3) MAC address Display the MAC address.

(4) IP Address Displays an IP address (only when it is set).

(5) LED Display LED status and communication status of PORT1 and PORT2. Display the icon when the target station is disconnected.

(6) Error buttons An error button is displayed when an error occurs on the CC-Link IE Field Network board or connection cable. The "Error details" screen is displayed by clicking the button.

(7) [Station No. Setting] button This button is displayed when a station number is not specified for the selected station. The "Station number setting" screen for changing the station number is displayed by clicking the button.

Item Description MAC Address of select station Display the MAC address of the selected station.

Station No. for setting Set the station number. Setting range: 1 to 120, numerals (0 to 9) in 3 digits only

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 129

13

Communication test Perform a communication test on CC-Link IE Field Network.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Communication Test] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Execute Test] button. The communication test is executed according to the set contents.

Displayed items

Item Description Communication Test Contents

Connected Station (Own) Display the network number and station number of the connected station.

Target Station Set the network number and station number.

Communication Data Setting Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), the number of communications (1 to 100 times), and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.

Item Description Communication Test Result Displays the result of inter-network communication test. Also in 'Presence or absence of errors on the communication

test', displays whether the communication test has been executed normally. Networks and stations routed from the own station (connected station) to the target station are displayed in the < > tab and those routed from the target station to the own station (connected station) are displayed in the < > tab.

Presence or absence of errors on the communication test

130 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Cable test Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the ports of the testing station.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Cable Test] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Execute Test] button. The cable test is executed on the testing station.

Displayed items

Item Description Cable Test Contents Testing Station Setting Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable

test.

Item Description Cable Test Result Display the cable test result, error factor, and troubleshooting of each port.

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 131

13

Link start/stop Start/stop the data link of a specified station. Use this function for debugging purposes to stop the station from receiving data from other stations and sending its own data.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Link Start/Stop] button

Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen.

2. Click the [Execute] button. The link start/stop is executed for all selected stations at once. When the process is completed, "Selected Status" are cleared and the contents of "Link Status" are updated.

Item Description Network Information Connected Station Information Display the network information of the connected station.

Link Start/Stop Setting Contents All Stations Information Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data link with the connected station. Target stations of the link start/stop operation can be selected in "Selected Status".

Link Start/Stop Executing Contents Select "Link Start"/"Link Stop". To forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or a special relay/special register, check "Forced Link Start".

[Select All] button Selects all stations displayed in the list.

[Cancel All Selections] button Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list.

132 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Network event history Display a list of event history occurred on the own station and on the network.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Network Event History] button

Displayed items

Item Description Network Event History Network Event History List Display the list of network event history.

Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.

Detailed Information Display the detailed information of an event selected in "Network Event History List".

[History Acquisition Setting] button Displays the "History Acquisition Setting" screen. Select events to be acquired.

[Clear Event History] button Clears the network event history existing in the board.

[Create CSV File] button Saves the network event history in CSV file format.

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 133

13

The number of displayed events Up to 1000 events can be displayed. When the maximum is reached, the events will be erased in sequence from the oldest one and the latest events will be displayed.

Incorrect display of error occurrence time and date If an error occurs during initial processing, '0000/00/00 00:00:00' will be displayed.

Sorting event history data Click each title to sort events.

The board automatically saves event history data on the flash ROM. Auto-save may fail if it operates after the board is reset or powered OFF and later ON until initial processing

is completed. If failed, the event, "Invalid event history data." is displayed in "Event history contents". An event, generated one second before the board is reset or powered OFF, is not saved to event history.

Click

134 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Reserved station function enable Cancel slave stations temporarily and reserve the slave station again. This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Reserved Station Function Enable] button

Operating procedure 1. Select reserved stations to be canceled temporarily or reserved again from "Reserved Station List".

2. Click the [OK] button. The selected reserved stations are canceled temporarily or reserved again. When the process is completed, the contents of "Reserved Station List" are updated.

Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification.

Resetting master station or turning OFF the system The temporary cancellation of reserved station specification is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station's network parameter.

Disconnecting a station for which reservation has been temporarily cancelled If the master station is reset, the master station and local stations will differ in the following: ERR. LED status Data in Reserved station specification (SW00C0 to SW00C7) and Reserved station function disable status (SW0180 to SW0187) The difference can be corrected by the following procedure. 1. Reconnect the disconnected station. 2. Temporarily cancel the reservation and then reserve the station again.

13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 135

13

Enable/Disable ignore station errors Set/restore temporary error invalid stations. This function can be performed when the connected station is a master station.

Window

[Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics] "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen [Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors] button

Operating procedure 1. Select stations to be set/restored as temporary error invalid stations from "Error Invalid Station List".

2. Click the [OK] button. The temporary error invalid stations are set/restored. When the process is completed, the contents of "Error Invalid Station List" are updated.

136 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13.2 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Station for which temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured When reservation for a slave station is temporarily canceled, temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured for the station.

An error invalid station is used in line topology. In the following cases, the station is not detected as a data link faulty station. However, stations subsequent to the disconnected station are detected as a data link faulty station.

Setting in the "Network status" on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen The temporary error invalid station setting/restoration can be performed from the network configuration of "Network Status" on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. The menu is displayed by right-clicking the target station. (Page 124 Icon)

Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect temporary error invalid station setting.

Resetting the master station or powering off the system Temporary error invalid station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station's network parameter.

Disconnecting a station for which temporary error invalid station setting has been configured If the master station is reset, the master station and local stations will differ in the following: ERR. LED status Temporary error invalid station setting (SW00E0 to SW00E7) The difference can be corrected by the following procedure. 1. Reconnect the disconnected station. 2. Configure temporary error invalid station setting and then cancel the setting

Error invalid station

Not detected as a data link faulty station Detected as a data link faulty station

Error

14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 137

14

14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY This chapter explains the features of the functions provided by the library. These functions are used when creating a user program to communicate with a programmable controller CPU. With these functions, a user can communicate without being aware of hardware types or communication protocols on the target. The following table shows the list of MD functions which are provided with the software package.

*1 A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of the device points at the access target. It is accessible to all device numbers. Use extended functions when creating a new program.

*2 For the version of CC-Link IE Field Network board and SW1DNC-CCIEF-B that can be used for the functions, refer to the following section. Page 223 Added and Changed Functions

For details on the MELSEC data link library function, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

Function name Description mdOpen Open a communication line.

mdClose Close a communication line.

mdSendEx Batch write devices. (Extended function*1)

Send data. (SEND function) (Extended function*1)

mdReceiveEx Batch read devices. (Extended function*1)

Receive data. (RECV function) (Extended function*1)

mdRandWEx Write devices randomly. (Extended function*1)

mdRandREx Read devices randomly. (Extended function*1)

mdDevSetEx Set a bit device. (Extended function*1)

mdDevRstEx Reset a bit device. (Extended function*1)

mdRemBufWriteEx Write data to the buffer memory of a remote device station.*2

mdRemBufReadEx Read data from the buffer memory of a remote device station.*2

mdTypeRead Read the type of programmable controller CPU.

mdControl Remote operation of programmable controller CPU. (RUN/STOP/PAUSE).

mdWaitBdEvent Wait for an event occurrence.

mdBdRst Reset the board.

mdBdModSet Set the mode of the board.

mdBdModRead Read the mode of the board.

mdBdLedRead Read the LED information of the board.

mdBdSwRead Read the switch status of the board.

mdBdVerRead Read the version information of the board.

mdInit Refresh the programmable controller device address.

mdSend Batch write devices.

Send data. (SEND function)

mdReceive Batch read devices.

Receive data. (RECV function)

mdRandW Write devices randomly.

mdRandR Read devices randomly.

mdDevSet Set a bit device.

mdDevRst Reset a bit device.

138 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY

MEMO

15 PROGRAMMING 15.1 Precautions on Programming 139

15

15 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains CC-Link IE Field Network programming.

15.1 Precautions on Programming This section explains precautions for creating CC-Link IE Field Network programs.

Cyclic transmission programs For cyclic transmission programs, interlock with the following link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW). (Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List, Page 199 Link Special Register (SW) List) Data link status (own station) (SB0049) Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7)

Transient transmission programs For transient transmission programs, interlock with the following link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW). (Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List, Page 199 Link Special Register (SW) List) Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) Baton pass status (each station) (SW00A0 to SW00A7)

140 15 PROGRAMMING 15.1 Precautions on Programming

MEMO

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 141

16

16 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the identification of the causes and corrective actions when an error occurs. Perform the troubleshooting in the following order in case of trouble.

Basic checking procedure Check if there is a corresponding error symptom written in "Error Examples". (Page 142 Error Examples) If the corresponding error could not be found, check the cause by following the procedure shown below.

Operating procedure 1. Check if all the boards installed on a personal computer are displayed with the utility. Page 160 Checking channel numbers Page 160 Checking operations with board diagnostics

2. Check the LED display of the board. Page 161 Checking LED status

3. Check the error occurring at the utility. Page 161 Checking operations with tests Page 164 Checking network status with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 164 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW)

4. Check the access target device. Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link device communication, or transient transmission/reception. Page 165 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device

5. Check the user program. Page 157 Checking operation environment Check the arguments of the communication function: MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Check the returned values of the communication function: Page 167 Error Code List

When an error cannot be solved If the problem is not solved by the corrective actions described in the manual, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

142 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.1 Error Examples

16.1 Error Examples The following tables show examples of the major errors under the specific conditions. When a corresponding error occurs, refer to the troubleshooting of each error.

Installation of the software package

Personal computer and utility

Board and driver

Error Description Reference Installation of the software package has failed.

Installation aborted. Page 144 Installation failed

Driver is not installed. Page 147 When the driver is not installed

A " ! " mark is displayed next to the icon of the driver name of board on the Device Manager screen of Windows.

Page 158 Checking on Device Manager screen

Uninstallation of the software package has failed.

The software package is not uninstalled despite the "uninstallation completed" message has been displayed.

Page 144 Uninstallation failed

Error Description Reference Personal computer does not start or shuts down.

The system error is displayed when OS rebooting is stopped and blue screen appears.

Page 148 Personal computer does not start or shuts down

Personal computer shuts down. The operating system down or system reset occurred when the system is in operation.

The system down occurred when deleting or disabling the driver.

Utility does not start up. There is no icon in the start menu of the operating system. The utility does not start up by clicking the icon.

Page 148 Utility does not startup

The screen or operation is abnormal. The utility screen is not displayed normally. The utility cannot be operated.

Page 149 The screen or operation is abnormal

The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed.

An unexpected screen is displayed. The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed.

Page 149 The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed.

Personal computer operates slowly. The operation of mouse or keyboard is slow. The operation of other application is slow. CPU utilization of personal computer is high. Operation of sound function is unstable.

Page 150 Personal computer operates slowly

Error Description Reference A WDT error occurred. A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred. (RUN LED is OFF.)

(RUN LED is OFF.) Page 150 Hardware error or board WDT error

A driver WDT error occurred. (RUN LED is flashing and RD LED is ON.)

Page 151 Driver WDT error

Driver does not activate. The driver cannot communicate with the board. (RUN LED is OFF.)

Page 151 Driver does not start

A bus error occurred. PCI bus/PCI Express bus error occurred. (RUN LED is flashing and SD LED is ON.)

Page 151 Bus error

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.1 Error Examples 143

16

Network access Error Description Reference An error occurred in the network data link.

The communication error occurred.(ERR.LED is ON/Flashing.) Page 152 Communication error (ERR. LED is ON/ Flashing)

The user program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules.

Page 152 User program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules

The board cannot perform communication occasionally while executing a user program.

Page 153 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program

Station is disconnected from the network unexpectedly. The connected station is disconnected unexpectedly. Data cannot be read from/written to the accessed station. Communication with the accessed station occasionally fails. A relevant station repeats network connection and

disconnection.

Page 153 Station is disconnected

Communication is unstable. The link scan time and transmission delay time is abnormally

longer. A timeout occurs during transient transmission.

Page 153 Communication is unstable

An error occurred while accessing the device via a network.

The cyclic transmission cannot be performed. The output of the own station does not reach the accessed

station. The change of the input from the accessed station does not

reach the own station. An unexpected value is set to the link device.

Page 154 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed

The transient transmission cannot be performed. The data cannot be written to the accessed station. The data cannot be read from the accessed station. The data cannot be monitored with the utility. The data cannot be read/written while accessing to the device

using a communication function with a user program.

Page 155 Transient transmission cannot be performed

144 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation

16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation The following explains the troubleshooting for error at installation or uninstallation.

Installation failed When the installation is aborted or failed, reinstall the utility by the following procedure.

Operating procedure 1. Check the installation/uninstallation precautions. Page 79 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions

2. Restart the personal computer.

3. If the utility can be uninstalled, uninstall it. After the uninstallation, restart the personal computer. Page 82 Uninstallation

4. Install the utility again by following the installation procedure. Page 80 Installation procedure, Page 145 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation

5. If the personal computer does not operate normally after the reinstallation, check if the personal computer has any problems.

Page 157 Checking operation environment, Page 158 Checking personal computer and operating system If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Uninstallation failed When the uninstallation fails, it is necessary to reinstall the software package and then uninstall the utility using the following procedure.

Operating procedure 1. Check the installation/uninstallation precautions. Page 79 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions If the creation of 8.3 filename is disabled, perform the following operation. Page 145 Operation for the creation of 8.3 filename is disabled

2. Save the data for installation to the system drive, or insert an installation media to the drive.

3. Display the "Run" screen from the Start Menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows.

4. Append option "-A" and execute "Setup.exe" in the installation data.

5. Install the utility again by following the installation procedure.

6. Perform the uninstallation.

7. If the utility cannot be uninstalled normally, check if the personal computer has any problems. Page 157 Checking operation environment, Page 158 Checking personal computer and operating system If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation 145

16

Operation for the creation of 8.3 filename is disabled

Operating procedure 1. Enable the creation of 8.3 filename.

2. Save the data for installation to the system drive, or insert an installation media to the drive.

3. Display the "Run" screen from the Start Menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows.

4. Append option "-G" and execute "Setup.exe" in the installation data.

5. Perform the uninstallation.

For option "-G", only SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.06G or later is supported. For Version 1.05F or earlier, obtain SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Version 1.06G or later. Then, append option "-G" and execute "Setup.exe" in the "SW1DNC-CCIEF-B_(each version)\Disk1" folder. For information on how to obtain the updated version, refer to the following section. Page 223 Update of software package

Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation The following table shows the corrective actions when the screen is displayed.

Screens Procedure This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled. Click [Allow] or the [Yes] button.

Click the [Yes] button. MELSECPowerManager is installed and the Windows Power Options settings are changed automatically. For details of MELSECPowerManager, refer to the following section. Page 231 MELSECPowerManager

146 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation

If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the installation completion, click "This program installed correctly". If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted, click the [Cancel] button and close the screen. Do not select "Reinstall using recommended settings". An incorrect module may be installed.

Click "Install this driver software anyway".

Confirm that the publisher is "MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION", and click the [Install] button. This screen may be displayed a couple of times.

The message is displayed when the .NET Framework 3.5 (including .NET 2.0 and 3.0) is set to disabled. Reinstall the utility after searching the "Turn Windows features on or off" on the control panel and enabling the function of ".NET Framework 3.5 (including .NET 2.0 and 3.0)". The procedure when the .NET Framework 3.5 (including .NET 2.0 and 3.0) is disabled is the same as MELSOFT products. For details of the procedure, refer to technical bulletin FA-A-0153 or FA-A-0207.

The message is displayed when a function that is necessary for installation has been set to disabled in Windows. Enable the setting by following the procedure shown below. 1. Select [Control Panel] [System and Security] [Administrative Tools] [Local Security Policy]. 2. Select [Local Policies] [Security Options]. 3. Select "Enable" for "User Account Control: Detect application installations and prompt for elevation". 4. Restart the personal computer.

Screens Procedure

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.2 Troubleshooting for Installation/Uninstallation 147

16

When the driver is not installed The driver is installed automatically when installing the board on the personal computer after installing the software package. If the "Found New Hardware Wizard" screen is not displayed automatically after the board installation, update the driver on the Device Manager screen.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

If "Block - Never install unsigned driver software" is selected under [Control Panel] [System] [Hardware] [Driver Signing], the driver may not be installed. Select "Ignore - Install the software anyway and don't ask for my approval", or "Warn - Prompt me each time to choose an action", and install the driver.

1. Open the Windows Device Manager. Right-click on "Network Controller" and select "Update Driver Software

2. Click "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)".

3. Save the data for installation to the system drive, or insert an installation media to the drive.

4. Set the following contents in "Search for the best driver in these locations" and click the [Next] button.

Check "Include this location in the search" and specify "\Drivers\x86" in the installation data. Check "Include this location in the search" and specify "\Drivers\x64" in the installation data. *1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system

information. For details, refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base. support.microsoft.com/kb/827218/ (As of January 2016)

End

148 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility

16.3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility

The following shows the troubleshooting for error for operation of a personal computer or utility. Page 148 Personal computer does not start or shuts down Page 148 Utility does not startup Page 149 The screen or operation is abnormal Page 149 The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed. Page 150 Personal computer operates slowly

Personal computer does not start or shuts down When the personal computer on which the board is installed does not start, or the system shuts down or system is reset, check the items following the procedure shown below.

Do not delete or disable the driver on the Windows Device Manager screen when the board is normally recognized. If it is deleted or disabled, the operating system may shut down (blue screen).

Operating procedure 1. Uninstall the board and check if the personal computer is started. Page 158 Checking personal computer and operating system

2. After restarting the personal computer, check if there is any error. Page 159 Checking operations with event viewer

3. Install the board and restart the personal computer. Page 157 Check the board installation Page 158 Checking on Device Manager screen If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms, refer to the following section.

Utility does not startup When the utility does not startup, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Item Corrective action Is an error message displayed? Take corrective action following the message. (Page 149 The screen for which

corrective action is not clear, is displayed.)

Is the icon of the utility displayed in the menu of the operating system? Does the utility start by clicking the icon?

The installation is not completed normally. Install the software package. (Page 144 Installation failed)

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility 149

16

The screen or operation is abnormal When the screen is not displayed normally or the software cannot be operated normally, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

The screen for which corrective action is not clear, is displayed. When an unexpected screen is displayed or the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective, check the following items. The following table shows the corrective actions when the screen is displayed.

For the error code, refer to the following section. Page 167 Error Code List For the screen displayed at installation, refer to the following section. Page 145 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation For the screens of the operating system, contact the operating system manufacturer. For the screens on which the user program is displayed, check the user program. If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Item Corrective action Is an error message displayed? Take corrective action following the message. (Page 149 The screen for which

corrective action is not clear, is displayed.)

Is the display setting correct? Check if the display setting is correct with Device Manager, and install the appropriate display driver.

Perform Windows Update Change the hardware acceleration setting in the display setting.

Are other applications being executed? Close the screens of all other applications.

Is there any error in the personal computer? Check the operating environment. (Page 157 Checking operation environment) Check the personal computer and operating system. (Page 158 Checking

personal computer and operating system)

Screens Corrective action This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled. Click "Allow" or the [Yes] button. For the method for disabling the screen, refer to the following section. Page 225 Windows Warning Message

User Account Control screen in which the password is required to be entered.

This screen is displayed when the log on user does not have administrator authority. Log on as a user with administrator authority.

150 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver

Personal computer operates slowly The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms have occurred and operating speed of the personal computer becomes slow. The operation of mouse or keyboard is slow. The operation of another application is slow. CPU utilization of personal computer is high. Operation of sound function is unstable. When the operating speed of the personal computer becomes slow, check the following items.

Replace the personal computer if its processing capability is lower for the desired processing.

16.4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver The following shows the troubleshooting for error for the functions. Page 150 Hardware error or board WDT error Page 151 Driver WDT error Page 151 Driver does not start Page 151 Bus error

Hardware error or board WDT error When a hardware error or board WDT error occurs, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Item Corrective action Is the CPU utilization of other application high? Start the Windows task manager, and specify the application with high CPU

utilization in the [Processes] or [Performance] tab. Reduce the execution frequency of the application with high CPU utilization.

Is the cyclic transmission operation time longer? Adjust the value of link refresh cycle setting. (Page 106 Driver setting) Set the constant link scan. (Page 102 Supplementary setting)

Is the transient transmission operation time longer? Adjust the number of transient transmissions. Reconsider "Event Condition" of the event function. (Page 104 Event setting)

Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly? Check the board installation status. (Page 157 Check the board installation)

Is the board operating normally on another personal computer? After formatting the HD, install the operating system again. Repair or replace the personal computer.

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.5 Troubleshooting for Data Link 151

16

Driver WDT error When the driver WDT error occurred, check the following items.

*1 A driver WDT error may occur when the system is overloaded temporarily due to the following factors. Windows start processing at the personal computer startup. Operation of a device driver such as a graphic board. Operation of other software applications.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Driver does not start When the driver does not start normally, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Bus error When a bus error occurs, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

16.5 Troubleshooting for Data Link The following shows the troubleshooting for error for the data link on the network. Page 152 Communication error (ERR. LED is ON/Flashing) Page 152 User program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules Page 153 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program Page 153 Station is disconnected Page 153 Communication is unstable

Item Corrective action Has the error occurred due to a temporary system overload ?*1 Reset the board. (Page 114 Resetting Board)

Restart the personal computer.

Has the same error occurred repeatedly? (Is the system overloaded constantly?)

Remove the factor of system overload. Disable the driver WDT function or increase the driver WDT monitoring time. (Page

106 Driver setting)

Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly? Check the board installation status. (Page 157 Check the board installation)

Is the channel number set properly? Check the channel number. (Page 160 Checking channel numbers)

Is the software package installed? Reinstall the software package. (Page 144 Installation failed)

Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly? Check the board installation status. (Page 157 Check the board installation)

Is the board operating normally on another personal computer? After formatting the HD, install the operating system again. Repair or replace the personal computer.

152 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.5 Troubleshooting for Data Link

Communication error (ERR. LED is ON/Flashing) When the ERR.LED is ON/flashing due to the communication error, check the following items.

ERR.LED is ON One of the following error occurred. An error is detected in all stations. Stations with same station number exist on the network. Network parameters are corrupted. Network parameters do not match the installation status. (Reserved station specification, number of connected stations,

network number etc.) Check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

ERR.LED is flashing The error station is detected. Check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

User program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules The 64-bit version user program cannot access CPU modules other than QCPU (Q mode) and MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules. Use 32-bit version user program.

Item Corrective action Is the network parameter set according to the actual board installation status?

Check the parameter settings. (Page 99 Setting Network Parameter)

Has a board error occurred? Perform the board test. (Page 160 Checking operations with board diagnostics)

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board standalone test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action Is a disconnected station displayed in the network configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics? (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen)

Perform a troubleshooting on the disconnected station for when D LINK LED is OFF or flashing. (Page 162 D LINK LED is turned OFF or flashing)

"Total stations" set for network parameter of the master station is different from the number of slave stations connected to the network.

Correct "Total stations" to match with the number of slave stations.

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.5 Troubleshooting for Data Link 153

16

Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program When the communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing a user program, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Station is disconnected The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms have occurred and the station is disconnected. The connected station is disconnected unexpectedly. Data cannot be read from/written to the accessed station. Communication with the accessed station occasionally fails. A relevant station repeats network connection and disconnection When the station is disconnected, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Communication is unstable When the link scan time and transmission delay time is abnormally longer or a timeout occurs during transient transmission, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Item Corrective action Is the error code returned to the user program? Check the returned value of the communication function. (Page 167 Error Code List)

Can the network error be monitored with utility? Check the network status with the utility. (Page 164 Checking network status with CC- Link IE Field Network diagnostics)

Does the same error occur when adding the station to the system?

Check if the same error occurs when adding the station in order next to the existing station for the system configuration which is configured only by a master station and own station. If the same error has occurred, check the added station. Page 157 Checking installation environment Page 157 Checking cables and wiring Page 161 Board test

Item Corrective action Is there influence of ambient temperature or noise? Check the installation environment. (Page 157 Checking installation environment)

Is there an error in the cable or hub? Is the wiring proper?

Check the cables and wiring. (Page 157 Checking cables and wiring)

Item Corrective action Is there influence of ambient temperature or noise? Check the installation environment. (Page 157 Checking installation environment)

Is the L ERR. LED of the master or slave station ON? Check the LED and take corrective action in the case of L ERR. LED turned ON. (Page 163 L ERR. LED/L ER LED is turned ON)

Does the error occur on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" screen in CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics?

When an error occurred on PORT1 and PORT2 , perform cable and self loopback tests. (Page 54 Cable test, Page 48 Self-loopback test)

154 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.6 Troubleshooting for Device Access

16.6 Troubleshooting for Device Access The following shows the troubleshooting when an error has occurred in the network data link. Page 154 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed Page 155 Transient transmission cannot be performed

Cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms have occurred and the cyclic transmission cannot be performed. The output of the own station does not reach the accessed station. The change of the input from the accessed station does not reach the own station. An unexpected value is set to the link device. When cyclic data are not delivered to the master or a slave station, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms, refer to the following section.

An unexpected value is set to the specific link device Check the following items.

Item Corrective action Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON? If the D LINK LED is flashing or OFF, perform the troubleshooting. (Page 162 D LINK

LED is turned OFF or flashing)

In "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station, is a slave station specified as a reserved station?

Cancel the reserved station setting of the slave station. (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

In "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station, is "RX/ RY Setting" or "RWw/RWr Setting" for slave stations configured?

Set RX/RY or RWw/RWr data for each slave station within the allowable range. (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

Do the station numbers set in "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station match those set for corresponding slave stations?

Correct the station number(s).

Do the station types set in "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station match those set for the connected slave stations?

Correct the station types set in "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station.

Is the station number of CC-Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station?

Change the duplicated station number.

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action Is there a link error station? Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 164

Checking network status with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics)

Is the parameter assignment range correct? Check the "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station. (Page 101 Network configuration setting)

Is the link device accessed using a user program? Check the argument of the communication function accessing to the link device.

Is the link device accessed from a sequencer in the network? Check the device range used in the sequence program.

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.6 Troubleshooting for Device Access 155

16

Transient transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms have occurred and the transient transmission cannot be performed. The data cannot be written to the accessed station. The data cannot be read from the accessed station. The data cannot be monitored with the utility. The data cannot be read/written while accessing to the device using a communication function with a user program. When transient transmissions cannot be executed to the target station, check the following items.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Item Corrective action Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON or flashing? If the D LINK LED is OFF, perform the troubleshooting. (Page 162 D LINK LED is

turned OFF or flashing)

Is the baton passing status of the target station normal? In the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action. (Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network)

Is the station number of CC-Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station?

Change the duplicated station number.

Is the Communication test result normal? (Page 55 Communication test)

In the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action. (Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network)

Is the MD function argument correct? Is the target station's network number correct? Is the target station number correct?

Check the MD function argument.

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

156 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method

16.7 Checking method The following shows the checking methods of the board.

Checking with eyesight Check the appearance of the device and connection status.

Checking the installation and wiring Check if the installation and wiring are performed within the range of the specification. Page 157 Checking installation environment Page 157 Check the board installation Page 157 Checking cables and wiring

Checking the board appearance The board status and network status can be checked by MODE LED or switch setting. Page 161 Checking LED status Page 160 Checking channel numbers

Checking the error Check the screen displayed on a personal computer.

Checking with the operating system The driver operation status can be checked with Device Manager or event viewer. Page 158 Checking personal computer and operating system Page 158 Checking on Device Manager screen Page 159 Checking operations with event viewer

Checking with the utility The board status and network status can be checked with the utility. Page 160 Checking channel numbers Page 160 Checking operations with board diagnostics Page 161 Checking operations with tests Page 161 Checking LED status Checking network status with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics: Page 164 Checking network status with CC-Link

IE Field Network diagnostics Page 164 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW) Page 165 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method 157

16

Checking installation environment Check if the installation environment is within the general specification or clear from noise. Page 34 General Specifications

Check the board installation Check the board for an abnormal installation.

Checking cables and wiring Check if there is an error in the cable or hub, disconnected connectors, or improper wiring.

Checking operation environment Check if the supported operating system and functions are used.

Item Corrective action Is the ambient temperature within the specified range? Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking action such as removing

heat source.

Is there any noise affecting the system? Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each device, and take measures against noise. (Page 39 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION)

Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly? Remove the board and reinstall it.

Change the installation location of the board. Fix the board firmly with screws.

Is the applicable number of boards installed? Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of applicable boards.

Item Corrective action Is a specifications compliant Ethernet cable used? Replace the cable with a specifications compliant Ethernet cable. (Page 29 Cables)

Is the station-to-station distance 100m or less? Change the station-to-station distance to 100m or less.

Does the cabling condition (bend radius) meet the specification?

Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable, and correct the bend radius.

Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Replace the Ethernet cable.

Is the switching hub normal? Check if the 1000BASE-T-compliant switching hub is used. (Page 29 Hubs) Power OFF and then ON the switching hub. Replace the switching hub.

Item Corrective action Is the operating system written in "Operating Environment" used? (Page 30 Operating Environment)

Use a personal computer on which the supported operating system is installed.

Is a programming language written in Operating Environment used for a user program using MELSEC data link library? (Page 30 Operating Environment)

Create a user program using a supported programming language. For precautions when using MELSEC data link library, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

Are the functions written in "The functions cannot be used" in "Operating Environment" set? (Page 30 Operating Environment)

Change the settings for the unsupported functions.

Is the personal computer logging on as a user with administrator authority

Log on as a user with administrator authority.

158 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method

Checking personal computer and operating system Check if the personal computer or operating system has any problem.

For the problem of the personal computer or operating system, consult the personal computer or operating system manufacturer.

Checking on Device Manager screen Check if the board is displayed on the Windows Device Manager.

If the problem is not solved by the above corrective actions, refer to the following section and contact us. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Do not uninstall or disable the driver of the board on the Device Manager when the board is normally recognized. If it is uninstalled or disabled, the operating system may shut down (blue screen).

"?" is displayed next to the icon, however, the CC-Link IE Field Network board is recognized normally.

Item Corrective action Is the power supply ensured? Check the power outlet and power cable of the personal computer.

Does the board operate normally if the other optional boards are uninstalled?

Change the installation location of the board. Check the resource acquisition status of other board and change the resource on the

BIOS setting screen or Device Manager screen. Reinstall the driver of the other optional boards. Replace the other optional boards.

Is the board operating normally on another personal computer? After formatting the HD, install the operating system again. Repair or replace the personal computer.

Item Corrective action Is the driver name of the board not displayed on the Device Manager screen?

The board or driver is not installed. If the board is not installed, install the board.

If the board is already installed, check the board installation status and reinstall the board. Reinstall the software package. (Page 144 Installation failed) If the board operates normally on another personal computer, the personal computer may

have problems. In this case, repair or replace the personal computer. If the board does not operate normally on another personal computer, replace the board.

Is "!" displayed next to the icon on the Device Manage screen? The board installation failed. Reinstall the software package. (Page 144 Installation failed) Check the board installation status and reinstall the board. If the board operates normally on another personal computer, the personal computer may

have problems. In this case, repair or replace the personal computer. If the board does not operate normally on another personal computer, replace the board.

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method 159

16

Checking operations with event viewer Check the operations of the board with the Windows event viewer.

For error events Errors occurred in the driver are displayed in the system log of the event viewer. Errors related to the CC-Link IE Field Network board are displayed as "Mccief" in the source field of the event viewer. The following explains error messages and their corrective actions.

For multiple errors, check the occurrence order (occurrence time) on the event viewer screen and perform corrective actions from the first error that occurred.

Event ID Error message Corrective action 256 (0100H)

Because the error had occurred in the during starting of the device, the device was not able to be executed.

Reinstall the software package. Check the board installation status. (Page 157 Check the board installation) If the board operates normally on another personal computer, the personal computer

may have problems. In this case, repair or replace the personal computer. If the error occurs on another personal computer, replace the board.

If any of the above actions do not solve the error, reinstall the operating system.

258 (0102H)

Time-out was detected while accessing the board.

Restart the personal computer. Check the board installation status. (Page 157 Check the board installation) If the board operates normally on another personal computer, the personal computer

may have problems. In this case, repair or replace the personal computer. If the error occurs on another personal computer, replace the board.

If any of the above actions do not solve the error, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

259 (0103H)

The board more than the maximum number of sheets which was able to be installed was detected.

Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of applicable boards.

279 (0117H)

An error occurred when Registry Database wrote out.

Restart the personal computer after installing the software package, and check if the error does not occur.

Increase the system memory and disk capacity. When the error has occurred at upgrading or updating the operating system with the

software package installed, reinstall the software package.

280 (0118H)

Own station received the request which was not processable from another station.

Check the board which is commanding a process and check the program in the programmable controller CPU.

286 (011EH)

Failed to allocate the Memory Area. Expand the memory in the personal computer.

287 (011FH)

The parameter is not set to the board. Otherwise, the parameter set to the board is broken.

Set parameters in the utility and reset the board.

288 (0120H)

Driver WDT error had occurred. Refer to the corrective action when the driver WDT error occurred. (Page 151 Driver WDT error)

295 (0127H)

The Board WDT error had occurred. Refer to the troubleshooting when the board WDT error occurred. (Page 150 Hardware error or board WDT error)

296 (0128H)

Board error was detected by the hardware self-diagnosis.

Restart the personal computer. Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred. (Page 150

Hardware error or board WDT error)304 (0130H)

305 (0131H)

Shift to the sleep, the hibernate, or the fast startup was detected. Because of the board supports neither the sleep nor the hibernate nor the fast startup, it does not operate normally.

Change the power option not to entering the sleep mode, hibernation mode, or enabling fast startup and restart the personal computer.

306 (0132H)

Detect "surprise removal". Please make sure of the installation of the interface board and the state of computer. (Channel:18x,Mcciefx,Busxx)

Check the board installation status, and reinstall the board after shutdown in case of an abnormal installation.

Check the personal computer operating status, and repair or replace the personal computer in case of an abnormal operation.

If an error occurred while using ftServer, consult Stratus Technologies, Inc.

160 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method

For information events The following information event logs other than errors are displayed in the system log of the event viewer. The corrective actions are not required for the following events.

Checking channel numbers Check if the channel numbers are properly assigned to the boards on the "Channel No. Setting" screen. Page 112 Setting Board Channel Numbers

Checking operations with board diagnostics Check the contents displayed in the board list on the "Board Diagnostics" screen. Page 117 Diagnosing Board

539 (021BH)

Board error was detected by the hardware self-diagnosis.

Restart the personal computer. Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred. (Page 150

Hardware error or board WDT error)540 (021CH)

541 (021DH)

542 (021EH)

543 (021FH)

Event ID Description Output timing 1024 (0400H)

Driver started normally. (Channel:18x,Mcciefx,Busxx)

At driver startup

1025 (0401H)

Board reset was executed. At board reset (Except for board reset at driver startup)

1026 (0402H)

Network parameter was updated. At common parameter transmission by master station

1027 (0403H)

State information was updated. At driver operation log update

Item Corrective action Are all installed boards displayed? Check the Device Manager screen. (Page 158 Checking on Device Manager

screen) Check the Event Viewer screen. (Page 159 Checking operations with event

viewer)

Are channel numbers duplicated? Set channel numbers so that they are not duplicated.

Item Corrective action Are all installed boards displayed? Check the channel numbers. (Page 160 Checking channel numbers)

Has a board error occurred? Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the error code list. (Page 167 Error Code List)

Event ID Error message Corrective action

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method 161

16

Checking operations with tests

Board test Check for hardware errors by performing board tests on the "Board Diagnostics" screen. Page 117 Diagnosing Board

For module test other than boards, refer to the manuals of each module.

Network tests Perform tests on the "Board Diagnostics" screen or the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen to check for errors in the connection status or settings of the network. Page 117 Diagnosing Board, Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Checking LED status The LED status can also be checked by the LED display on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen, other than checking the board visually. Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor When using the software package version 1.04E or later, the LED status of MODE, D LINK, and L ERR cannot be confirmed on the "CC IE Field diagnostics" screen. Confirm the LED status with the value stored in the following link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW).

Item Description Reference Bus I/F test Check the hardware related to the bus I/F function of the CC-Link IE Field Network

board. Page 46 Bus I/F test

Memory test Check the memory of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 46 Memory test

Hardware test Check the hardware in the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Page 47 Hardware test

Self-loopback test Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Page 48 Self-loopback test

Item Corrective action Reference Loop test Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each station. Page 53 Loop test

Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable. Page 54 Cable test

Communication test Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from the own station to the target station is correct.

Page 55 Communication test

LED Status SB/SW MODE ON The value of SW0043 is '0' or '1'.

Flash The value of SW0043 is '2'

OFF The value of SW0043 is '6', '7', or '9'.

D LINK ON SB0049 is OFF

Flash SB0049 is ON and SB0047 is OFF

OFF SB0049 is ON and SB0047 is ON

L ERR ON SB006C is ON or SB006D is ON

OFF SB006C is OFF and SB006D is OFF

162 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method

Check the LED status and take the corresponding corrective actions.

If the LED does not turn ON in synchronization with the utility display or execution status of the board, LED failure may occur. In this case, replace the board.

MODE LED is turned OFF or flashing MODE LED is an LED which does not exist on the board. Check the status with the LED display on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. (Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor) When the MODE LED is turned OFF, it is in the offline mode. When the MODE LED is flashing, it is in the test mode.

D LINK LED is turned OFF or flashing D LINK LED is an LED which does not exist on the board. Check the status with the LED display on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. (Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor) When the D LINK LED is turned OFF, both cyclic transmission and transient transmission of the board are stopped. When the D LINK LED is flashing, the cyclic transmission of the board is stopped, or communication route is consecutively built because the network communication route is unstable.

LED Status Description Reference

RUN ERR. SD RD ON OFF OFF OFF Operating normally.

(Data send/receive is not performed.) Corrective action unnecessary

ON OFF ON Operating normally. (Sending data)

ON OFF ON Operating normally. (Receiving data)

ON ON/Flash Communication error has occurred. Page 152 Communication error (ERR. LED is ON/Flashing)

OFF OFF OFF OFF A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred.

Page 150 Hardware error or board WDT error

The driver is not started. Page 151 Driver does not start

Flash ON Driver WDT error has occurred. Page 151 Driver WDT error

Flash ON PCI bus/PCI Express bus error has occurred. Page 151 Bus error

LED Status Description Reference P1, P2 L ER OFF Operating normally.

The module received normal data. The board does not perform loopback. Linkup in progress.

Corrective action unnecessary

LINK ON

L ER ON The module received abnormal data. The board is performing loopback.

Page 163 L ERR. LED/L ER LED is turned ON

LINK OFF Linkdown in progress. Page 163 LINK LED is turned OFF

Item Corrective action Is the mode set to the online mode? Change the mode to the online mode. (Page 99 Setting Network Parameter)

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action Is the master station connected to the network and operating normally? If an error has occurred in the master station, solve the error.

Check if the master station is performing data link with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and perform the corrective action. (Page 118 Diagnosing CC- Link IE Field Network)

When the master station and submaster station are the module other than the MELSEC iQ-R series, and there is a local station of the MELSEC iQ-R series module, refer to the following section. (Page 28 Precautions for when connecting the MELSEC iQ-R series module)

Are the connected other stations normal? Check if the other station's power is turned ON.

Are cables and wiring normal? Check the cables and wiring. (Page 157 Checking cables and wiring) Perform a loop test. (Page 53 Loop test) Perform a cable test. (Page 54 Cable test)

Is the loopback function enabled for the master station? Configure a ring topology without connecting the switching hub.

L ER LED

LINK LED

RJ45 connector

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method 163

16

L ERR. LED/L ER LED is turned ON An error has occurred due to received data or loop. The L ER LED of the PORT which detected the error is turned ON. The error detail can be checked with the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen) L ERR. LED is turned OFF automatically when a normal data is received or the loopback function is not performed in a ring topology.

LINK LED is turned OFF This indicates a status in which the board can not communicate (link down).

Check for any of the following wiring conditions. Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub Although the loopback function is disabled, the network is configured

in ring topology. Although the loopback function is enabled, the network is configured in

star topology. The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology.

Correct the wiring. (Page 19 Single Network System) When not using the loopback function

Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network (either PORT1 or PORT2).The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start.

When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter. (Page 77 Loopback Function)

Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured. (Page 77

Loopback Function) If incorrect, correct the network parameter and rewrite it. When data link starts over the network, the action is successful.

Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power OFF and then ON the hub. (Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network.)

When data link starts over the network, check the network configuration by CC- Link IE Field Network diagnostics. (Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network)

Is the station number duplicated with any of other stations? Change the duplicated station number.

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action Are cables and wiring normal? Check the cables and wiring. (Page 157 Checking cables and wiring)

Perform a cable test. (Page 54 Cable test)

Are the connected other stations normal? Check if the other station's power is turned ON.

Is the master station set to online mode? Change the mode of the master station to online. (Page 99 Setting Network Parameter)

Is the installation environment within the specifications? Is there any noise influence?

Check the installation environment. (Page 157 Checking installation environment)

Is the loopback function enabled for the master station? When the loopback function is enabled, check if the ring topology is correctly configured for the port where the L ER LED is on. (Page 24 Configuration in which data link cannot be performed (incorrect ring topology))

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action Are cables and wiring normal? Check the cables and wiring. (Page 157 Checking cables and wiring)

Perform a cable test. (Page 54 Cable test)

Are the connected other stations normal? Check if the other station's power is turned ON.

Is the board hardware operating normally? Perform the board test. (Page 161 Board test)

Item Corrective action

164 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method

Checking network status with CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics Check the network condition on the "CC IE Field Diagnostics" screen. Page 119 Displaying diagnostics screen

Checking network status with monitoring link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW) Check link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW) with Device Monitor Utility.

For Device Monitor Utility, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual For link special relays (SB) and link special registers (SW), refer to the following section. Page 188 Link Special Relay (SB) List, Page 199 Link Special Register (SW) List

Item Corrective action Are all installed boards displayed on the "Select Diagnostics Destination" screen? (Page 119 Selecting diagnostics target board)

Check the channel numbers. (Page 160 Checking channel numbers)

Is an error displayed on the network configuration diagram? Check the details of the communication error on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" screen. (Perform the troubleshooting described on the "Error details" screen.) (Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor)

Are details of the error station selected on the network configuration diagram displayed on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" screen?

Click the button displayed when an error occurs on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" screen and perform the troubleshooting described on the "Error details" screen. (Page 127 Selected station communication status monitor) The following are the causes for when details of the error station are not displayed. Master station duplication Station number duplication Slave station type error

Check the "Board Diagnostics" screen and identify the cause of the error. (Page 117 Diagnosing Board) If the error station is a module, identify the cause of the error with System Monitor of GX Works2.

Is there any error log on the "Network Event History" screen? (Page 132 Network event history)

Check the detailed information and identify the cause of the error.

Item Corrective action Is SB0047 (Baton pass status (own station)) faulty (ON)? Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be

performed at own station. (Page 155 Transient transmission cannot be performed)

Is SW00A0 to SW00A7 (Baton pass status (each station)) faulty (ON)? Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be performed at station in which baton pass error has occurred. (Page 155 Transient transmission cannot be performed)

Is SB0049 (Data link status (own station)) faulty (ON)? Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at own station. (Page 154 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed)

Is there a cyclic transmission error station in SW00B0 to SW00B7 (Data link status (each station))?

Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at station in which data link error has occurred. (Page 154 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed)

Is SB004A/SB004B (Own station's CPU status (1)/Own station's CPU status (2)) faulty (ON)?

Check the Windows event viewer. (Page 159 Checking operations with event viewer)

Is there an error station in SW0100 to SW0107/SW0110 to SW0117 (Operation status (each station) (1)(2))?

Refer to the CPU module manual regarding the CPU of the station in which a CPU Stop error/Continuation error has occurred, perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module.

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.7 Checking method 165

16

Checking communication status with monitoring access target device Monitor the link device and access target device with Device Monitor Utility. Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link device communication, or transient transmission/reception.

For Device Monitor Utility, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual

Item Corrective action An error message is displayed. Take corrective action following the message.

Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the error code list. (Page 167 Error Code List)

Is an unexpected value set to the link device? Take corrective action for when an unexpected value is set to the link device.(Page 154 An unexpected value is set to the specific link device)

Is the device able to be written with Device Monitor Utility? Check the user program when the access can be performed normally with Device Monitor Utility.

166 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.8 Information Required for Inquiries

16.8 Information Required for Inquiries When the troubleshooting cannot solve the problem, or a board failure occurs, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative. Inform the following conditions and situations when inquiring the problems.

Product information

Failure content

Item Condition/Situation Reference Product version Board Model: Q80BD-J71GF11-T2/Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Rating plate: _____ __________-_ Product information: _____ __________-_

Page 222 Checking Serial Number and Function Version

Utility Model: SW1DNC-CCIEF-( ) Version: _.__ _

Page 90 Help Function

Personal computer Personal computer name

Manufacturer: Personal computer name:

Page 30 Operating Environment

CPU (Example: Intel Core2 Duo Processor 3GHz)

Memory size

OS (Example: Windows XP Professional)

Other option boards Existence (If exists, type, the number of boards and so on)

Situation checked with disconnecting other option boards

Item Condition/Situation Failure description (Example: The RUN LED does not turn ON even though the computer is started.)

Occurrence frequency

Occurrence condition If the failure occurs only in the specific case, inform the occurrence condition noticed.

Troubleshooting result Inform the following descriptions. The result of troubleshooting performed The situation when checking with other boards or computers. (Example: Event ID 295 "The Board WDT error had occurred." is displayed on the event viewer when the personal computer is started. It also occurs when mounting the problem board with another computer. Other boards mounted with the computer work properly.)

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List 167

16

16.9 Error Code List The list of error codes is shown. For error codes which are not listed in this section, refer to the following manual. MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual If the error still occurs after the corrective action, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative. For information required for inquiries, refer to the following section. Page 166 Information Required for Inquiries

Error code

Error code Corrective action

D000H to D00FH

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D010H to D013H

Parameter error Correct the points assigned to the link devices.

D014H to D016H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D018H Parameter error Correct the constant link scan time.

D019H to D020H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D030H to D035H

Connection failure Correct the wiring condition.

D036H Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D037H Connection failure Check the number of connected modules.

D040H Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D041H Connection failure Check the number of connected modules.

D080H to D084H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D0A0H Transient data transmission response wait timeout

If the own station or target station is disconnected from the network, identify the cause of the disconnection and take action. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data, reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation.

D0A1H Transient data transmission completion wait timeout

Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Perform hardware and self-loopback tests. (Page 47 Hardware test, Page 48 Self-loopback test)

D0A2H Transient data transmission processing wait timeout

Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D0A3H Transient data transmission error If the own station or target station is disconnected from the network, identify the cause of the disconnection and take action. Correct the target station number of the transient data, and retry the operation. If the target station of the transient data resides in another network, check if the routing parameters for respective stations are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D0A4H to D0A6H

Transient transmission failed Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Perform hardware and self-loopback tests. (Page 47 Hardware test, Page 48 Self-loopback test)

D0A7H Transient reception failed

D0C0H to D0D0H

Process error The error has occurred in the following process. Wait for a while, and retry the operation. D0C0H: Reserved station specification D0C1H: Disabling the reserved station D0C2H: Data link stop instruction D0C3H: Data link start instruction D0C4H: Temporary error invalid station setting D0C5H: Cancellation of temporary error invalid station setting D0C6H: Change of other station number setting D0D0H: Other station number setting

D0E0H Station type mismatch In "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station, change the station type to that of the own station.

168 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List

D0E1H Own station specified as reserved In "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station, cancel the reserved station setting. Change the station number of the own station to a station number that is not reserved.

D0E2H Station No. duplication (own station) Change the station number so that it will not be duplicated with any other station number. After taking the above action, power OFF and then ON all the stations that detected the station number duplication error, or reset them.

D0E3H Own station No. out of range Add information of the own station to "Network Configuration Setting" of the master station.

D0E4H Multiple master stations (including own station)

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. After taking the above action, power OFF and then ON all the stations that detected this error, or reset them.

D0F0H to D113H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D200H Transient data received twice Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D201H Header information error in transient data

Correct the header information at the request source, and retry the operation.

D202H Send buffer full Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly.

D203H Read/write address error in transient data

Correct the read/write address at the request source, and retry the operation.

D204H Network No. error in transient data Correct the network number at the request source, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D205H Target station No. error in transient data

Correct the target station number at the request source, and retry the operation.

D206H Network No. error in transient data Correct the network number at the request source, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D207H Incorrect number of relays specified in transient data

Correct the system configuration to reduce the number of relay stations to seven or less. Check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D208H Network No. error in transient data Correct the network number at the request source, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D209H Target station No. error in transient data

Correct the target station number at the request source, and retry the operation.

D20AH

D20BH Specified master station No. error in transient data

D20CH Current master station No. error in transient data

D20DH Transient data transmission completion wait timeout

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. When the own station or target station detected an error, identify the cause of the error and take action. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D20EH Header information error in transient data

Correct the header information at the request source, and retry the operation.

D20FH Target station No. error in transient data

Check if the command can be requested to all or a group of stations at the request source, and retry the operation.

D210H Target station No. error in transient data

Correct the header information at the request source, and retry the operation.

D211H Own station No. undefined (dedicated instruction)

Set the station number in the parameter setting, and retry the operation.

D212H Transient transmission failed Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly. Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation.

D213H Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

Error code

Error code Corrective action

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List 169

16

D214H Transient data request error Correct the data length at the request source, and retry the operation.

D215H Transient data request error Change the mode to Online, and retry the operation.

D216H to D217H

Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

D218H Transient data request error At the request source, correct the number of the data to be read from or written to the device, and retry the operation.

D219H Transient data request error Correct the attribute code at the request source, and retry the operation.

D21AH Transient data request error Correct the access code at the request source, and retry the operation.

D21BH to D21CH

Transient data request error Abnormal transient data were issued from the CPU module. Replace the CPU module and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D21DH Network No. error in transient data A cable test cannot be applied to a network of a different network number. Correct the data in "Testing Station Setting", and retry the cable test. Transient data that is not applicable to a different network were received. Correct the network number or target station number at the request source, and retry the operation.

D21EH Target station No. error in transient data

The communication test cannot be executed with the relay station(s) specified. Correct "Communication Destination Setting", and then execute the communication test again. Transient data of the application type that is not executable for the own station were received. Correct the application type or target station number at the request source, and retry the operation.

D21FH Target station type error (dedicated instruction)

The SEND instruction is not applicable to head modules. Modify the program so that the SEND instruction will not be used for head modules.

D220H No master station Add a master station to the network.

D222H Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

D223H Transient error Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D22EH Station No. setting not available for the target station

Although change of the target station number was attempted online from the master station, the target station does not have the online station number setting function. Check the manual for the target station for availability of the station number setting function. If the function is supported by the model, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or

representative.

D22FH No baton pass for the target station Check the communication status of the station whose station number will be changed.

D230H Incorrect station No. specified Station number change was attempted for the own station (master station). Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change.

D231H Station No. already set for the target station

For the target station of station number change, a station number has already been set. Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change.

D232H Station No. setting target not exist The target station of station number change does not exist. Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change.

D234H No baton pass Check the communication status.

D235H Transient error Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D240H to D243H

Target network module failure (dedicated instruction)

Correct the following settings at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. D240H: Network number D241H: Target station number D242H: Command code D243H: Channel used (correct within the range)

If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D244H Incorrect transient data Correct the transient data at the request source, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D245H Target station No. error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the target station number at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D246H Incorrect transient data Correct the transient data at the request source, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Error code

Error code Corrective action

170 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List

D247H Dedicated instruction received twice Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D248H Incorrect transient data Correct the transient data at the request source, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D249H Target station's CPU type error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the target station's CPU type at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D24AH Arrival monitoring time error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the arrival monitoring time at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. When the own station or target station has detected an error, identify the cause of the error and take action. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D24BH Number of resends error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. When the own station or target station has detected an error, identify the cause of the error and take action. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D24CH Target network No. error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. If the request source resides in another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D24DH Incorrect channel used for the dedicated instruction

For the SEND instruction, set 1 or 2 for the target channel No. in the control data. For the REMFR/REMTO instruction, set any of 1 to 32 for the channel No.

D24EH Dedicated instruction error An invalid value is set for the control block of the dedicated instruction. Correct the value, and then retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D24FH Own station No. undefined (dedicated instruction)

Set the station number in "Network Parameter", and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D250H Flash ROM failure The flash ROM may be faulty. Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D251H Arrival confirmation error (dedicated instruction)

Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction, and retry the operation. When the own station or target station has detected an error, identify the cause of the error and take action. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D252H Transmission completion wait timeout (dedicated instruction)

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D253H Response timer timeout (dedicated instruction)

The dedicated instruction did not end within the transient timeout monitoring time. Send data from other station may be received, or the specified target station for executing the dedicated instruction may be failed. When executing the RECV instruction, check if a message is sent from another station. Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D254H Unsupported request received (dedicated instruction)

Change the target station at the station that sent the SEND instruction. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D255H Target station No. error (dedicated instruction)

Check the target station number, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D256H Execution/abnormal end type error (dedicated instruction)

Check the execution/abnormal end type, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Error code

Error code Corrective action

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List 171

16

D257H Request type error (REQ) Check the request type in the request data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D258H Specified/current control station not exist (dedicated instruction)

Check the target station number, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D259H Mode error during dedicated instruction execution

Change the mode of the master station from "Loop test" to "Online", and execute it again. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D25AH Channel in use (dedicated instruction)

Retry it after a little while. Change the channel for the own or target station.

D25BH Channel in use (dedicated instruction)

Change the channel for the own or target station.

D25CH Dedicated instruction error An invalid value is set for the control block of the dedicated instruction. Correct the value, and then retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D25DH Incorrect transient data Check the transient data at the request source, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D25EH Dedicated instruction error Another CC-Link dedicated instruction is in execution. Retry it after a little while. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D25FH Station type error (REMFR/REMTO executing station)

The REMFR/REMTO instruction is not available for stations other than master and local stations. Modify the program so that the REMFR/REMTO instruction will not be used.

D260H Station type error (REMTO executing station)

The REMTO instruction is not available for local stations. The REMTO instruction must be executed on the master station.

D261H Station type error (CCPASET executing station)

Parameter setting using the CCPASET instruction is not available for local stations. It must be executed to the master station.

D262H Number of total slave stations setting error (CCPASET)

Correct the number of total slave stations in the control data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D263H Constant link scan time setting error (CCPASET)

Correct the constant link scan time in the control data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D264H Station No. range error (CCPASET) Change the station number in the setting data to any of 1 to 120, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D265H Duplicate station No. (CCPASET) Correct the station number in the setting data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D266H Number of total slave stations error (CCPASET)

Correct the number of total slave stations in the setting data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D267H Station type error (CCPASET) Change the station type value in the setting data to any of 0 to 3, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D268H Device range assignment error (CCPASET)

Correct the link device offset or size of slave station(s) in the setting data, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D269H Target station type error Set the target station number in the REMFR/REMTO instruction to the station number of an intelligent device station.

D26AH Target station No. error Reconnect the target station of the REMFR/REMTO instruction.

D26BH Network No. error (CCPASET executing station)

Set any of 1 to 239 to Switch 1 (network No.) in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master/local module.

D26CH Station No. error (CCPASET executing station)

When activating as a master station, set 0 to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master/local module. When activating as a local station by the CCPASET instruction, use a master/local module with a serial number whose first five digits are '12072' or higher. When activating as a local station, set a value within the range from 3101H to 3178H to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master/local module.

D26DH Mode error (CCPASET executing station)

Set 0 to Switch 3 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master/local module

D280H Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

D281H Transient reception failed Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data, send the data to the target station after the load on the station is reduced.

D282H Receive queue full Temporarily stop the transient transmission, and then retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient transmission. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D283H Transient transmission failed Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation.

Error code

Error code Corrective action

172 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List

D2A0H Receive buffer full Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data, send the data to the target station after the load on the station is reduced.

D2A1H Send buffer full Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D2A2H Transmission completion wait timer timeout

Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly.

D2A3H to D2ADH

Error in transient data Adjust the following settings at the request source of transient, and retry the operation. D2A3H: Number of data (frame length) D2A4H: Header information D2A5H: Target station number D2A6H: Request source number D2A7H to D2A8H: Header information D2A9H: Target network number D2AAH: Target station number D2ABH: Network number of the request source D2ACH: Station number of the request source D2ADH: Number of data (frame length)

D2AEH Target station No. error in transient data

The own station received transient data that is addressed to another station on the route. Check and correct the network and target station numbers, and retry the operation. Check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D2AFH Target station No. error in transient data

Transient data transmission addressed to the own station was requested. Check the network number and target station number, and retry the operation. Check if the routing parameters are correctly set, and take corrective action.

D2B0H Transient transmission failed Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly. Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation.

D602H to D609H

Parameter error Write the network parameters to the board again. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D60AH Parameter error (Link scan mode/constant link scan time setting error)

Set the link scan mode to asynchronous, or cancel the constant link scan time setting.

D60DH to D610H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D611H to D618H

Parameter error (Device range assignment error)

Correct the link device size of slave station(s), and retry the operation. D611H, D612H: RWw D613H, D614H: RWr D615H, D616H: RY D617H, D618H: RX

D619H to D61AH

Parameter error Write the network parameters to the board again. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D61BH to D61EH

Parameter error (Overlapping of the device)

Correct the link device offset or size of slave station(s), and retry the operation. D61BH: RWw D61CH: RWr D61DH: RY D61EH: RX

D61FH CCPASET execution error Erase the network parameter settings, select "Write to PLC", and execute the CCPASET instruction again.

D620H Incorrect transient data Check the transient data at the request source, and retry the operation. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D621H to D62CH

Parameter error Write the network parameters to the board again. Correct the network parameters, and retry the operation. D622H: Number of total slave stations error D624H: Constant link scan time setting error D625H: Block data assurance per station setting error D628H: Station type error D629H: Station No. range error

Error code

Error code Corrective action

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List 173

16

D62DH Failed to start data link The system failed to start data link due to any of the following causes. Remove the cause of the problem, and retry the operation. No station number setting Own station error Master station duplication Station type mismatch No master station Invalid station number of the own station Duplication of the own station number Own station specified as reserved station Parameter error Parameters being sent Parameters not received (Only the master station, and no slave stations exist.) Link stop instruction

D630H CCPASET execution error at local station

Specify the network number, station type, and station number in the switch setting, and execute the instruction again in the condition in which the network parameters are not set.

D701H No station specified for Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting

Specify relevant station(s) in Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting (SW0010 to SW0017), and retry the operation.

D706H Request error of temporary error invalid station setting/cancel or reserved station function disable/ enable (when the own station is a local station)

For a local station, temporary error invalid station setting/cancel and reserved station function disable/ enable cannot be executed. Retry it on the master station.

D70BH Request error of temporary error invalid station setting/cancel or reserved station function disable/ enable (when concurrently requested to multiple stations)

Temporary error invalid station setting/cancel by SB0010 and SB0011 and reserved station function disable/enable by SB0012 and SB0013 cannot be executed at the same time. Turn OFF all bits in SB0010 to SB0013, and turn ON only one bit of them in the relay.

D720H Data link start/stop instruction out of range

Check the setting, and then stop or start data link.

D721H Link start/stop retry error (to another station)

Retry the operation after stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed.

D722H Link start/stop retry error (to own station)

D723H Link start/stop retry error (to entire system)

D724H Link start/stop station error Check the setting, and then stop or start cyclic transmissions.

D725H Station type error (station executing data link start/stop to the entire system)

A local station cannot start or stop data link of all or multiple stations. Execute data link start/stop of all or multiple stations from the master station

D726H Transient data request error Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

D727H Data link start/stop instructing station error

Link start was instructed from a station different from the station that instructed the link stop. The station instructing a link start must be the same as the station that instructed the link stop. The method of the link start (data link start instruction in CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics or by using the link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW) in the program) is different from that of the link stop. Instruct the link start by the same method as used for the link stop instruction. Link start has failed in the past. Force the system to restart data link.

D728H Data link start/stop instructing station error

Link start was instructed during execution of data link. Instruct link start after instruction of link stop.

D780H History acquisition setting data full The area for writing history acquisition setting data for the network event history is insufficient. Reset or power OFF and then ON the module.

D781H Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D782H History acquisition setting data error The previous history acquisition setting data for the network event history was not written successfully. Reset or power OFF and then ON the module.

D783H to D784H

Transient data request error The read request in "CC-Link IE Field Network Diagnostics" is incorrect. Close the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics dialog box, and request it again. Check the read request data at the request source station, and retry the operation.

D785H Flash ROM failure The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded. Replace the master/local module or board.

Error code

Error code Corrective action

174 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List

D786H Flash ROM failure The flash ROM may be faulty. Perform hardware and self-loopback tests. (Page 47 Hardware test, Page 48 Self-loopback test)

D800H to D805H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D806H Receive queue full Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly. Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient transmission.

D807H Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D80AH to D80FH

Parameter error Write the network parameters again to the programmable controller. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D812H to D813H

Parameter check result error

D814H to D819H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D81AH CPU module stop error (Board driver stop error)

Check the error on the "PLC Diagnostics" screen in GX Works2, and take action. If the error has occurred on the board, check it in the event viewer. (Page 159 Checking operations with event viewer)

D81BH Programmable controller power failure

The power is OFF. Turn it ON.

D81DH to D825H

Buffer memory start parameter error Correct the following settings in the buffer memory start parameter area D81DH: Total number of slave stations D81FH: Station number range D820H: Total number of slave stations D821H: Slave station setting information D822H: Station type D823H: Offset values or points assigned to the devices of each station D824H: Setting flag D825H: Setting flag, application parameter, and information setting data

D826H Flash ROM failure The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded. Check the network event history and configure the setting such as not to generate events consecutively. This error code cannot be cleared. To clear this error code, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D827H Communication RAM failure Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

D902H Incorrect online test data Check the data at the station that initiated the online test, and retry the test. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

D903H Communication test retry error After completion of the communication test, retry it.

D905H Communication monitoring time in communication test timed out

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, take action, and retry the operation. Check if the routing parameters are correctly set.

D906H Communication test transmission completion wait timeout

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, take action, and retry the operation. Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation. When the mode of the master station is "Online (High Speed Mode)", change it to "Online (Normal Mode)" and retry the operation. Check if the routing parameters are correctly set.

D909H Header information error in transient data

Correct the header information at the request source, and retry the operation.

D90AH Communication test data received twice

Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, take action, and retry the operation.

D90BH Incorrect number of stations Check the network condition by CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and take action. If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120, reduce it to 120 or less.

D90CH Communication target station specification error

Check "Communication Destination Setting" of the communication test, and retry the operation.

D90DH Cable test retry error After completion of the cable test, retry it.

DA00H to DAE7H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

DAE8H Switch setting error When using the CCPASET instruction, check the intelligent function module switch settings, and write the setting data to the CPU module. When not using the CCPASET instruction, clear the intelligent function module switch settings, and rewrite the setting data to the CPU module. If this error persists, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

DAF1H Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

Error code

Error code Corrective action

16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.9 Error Code List 175

16

Hardware error A malfunction may have occurred due to noise. Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each device,

and take measures against noise. (Page 39 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION) Hardware may be faulty. Test the board alone. (Page 161 Board test)

DAF2H Failed to write to flash ROM The flash ROM may be faulty. Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)DAF3H MAC address read error

DAF5H to DAF7H

Hardware error Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

DAF8H to DAF9H

Flash ROM failure The flash ROM may be faulty. Refer to corrective action for hardware error. (Page 175 Hardware error)

Error code

Error code Corrective action

176 APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System

APPENDIX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant

CPU System This section explains precautions for accessing a redundant CPU system via CC-Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET/ H network using the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Redundant CPU specification When the system (control system, standby system, system A, system B) of the Redundant CPU is specified to access the Redundant CPU, the Logical station No. set on the "Target setting" screen of the CC IE Field Utility is used for access. For the Logical station No. setting, refer to the following section. Page 107 Target setting

Operation at occurrence of system switching When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU, access to the Redundant CPU set for the Logical station No. is continued.

Ex.

When the following Logical station No.(66) was specified for access

Item Description Logical station No.(66)

Network No. 1

Station No. 1

Multiple PLC Not specified

Redundant PLC Control system

MELSECNET/H

Station No.5

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.2Station No.1

Standby systemControl system

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

CC-Link IE Field Network

Tracking cable

(Network No.1)(Network No.2)

APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System 177

A

Checking the system to access target To check which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by the CC-Link IE Field Network board, create a program to monitor the following special relays. The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected. When checking which system is being accessed, System A or System B

When checking the operation system status

Retry processing for the error that occurs during system switching processing When the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching being processed by the Redundant CPU, a system switching error (error code: 4248H), CPU starting error (error code: 4004H), other system CPU module error (error code: 4245H), access destination illegal error (error code: FFDFH) or similar error occurs. In this case, create a user program that checks the error code and performs retry processing as necessary.

Functions that result in error if executed during system switching

Special relay System A System B At the time of TRK.CABLE ERR. (Error code: 6120) occurrence (System not determined.)

SM1511 (System A identification flag) ON OFF OFF

SM1512 (System B identification flag) OFF ON OFF

Special relay Control system Standby system At the time of TRK.CABLE ERR. (Error code: 6120) occurrence (System not determined.)

SM1515 (Control system judgment flag)

ON OFF OFF

SM1516 (Standby system judgment flag)

OFF ON OFF

Functions that result in error by system switching MELSEC data link library mdDevSetEx, mdDevRstEx, mdRandREx, mdRandWEx, mdReceiveEx, mdSendEx, mdControl, mdDevRst,

mdDevSet, mdRandR, mdRandW, mdReceive, mdSend, mdTypeRead

MELSECNET/H

Station No.5

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.2Station No.1

Standby systemControl system

Control systemStandby system

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

CC-Link IE Field Network (Network No.1)(Network No.2)

Tracking cable

178 APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System

Error occurrence The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write.

*1 For details and corrective action of the error code, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

*2 Execute retry processing as required depending on the system specifications.

Automatic switching of communication path When a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET/H, the communication path is automatically switched to continue access to the control system. Hereinafter, this automatic switching of the communication path is referred to as path switching. The following describes the path switching conditions, checking method of path switching occurrence, and access examples of path switching.

Path switching conditions When access is being processed under the following conditions, access to the Redundant CPU is continued by path switching even though a communication error occurs.

Note, however, that if a tracking error*1 has already occurred at the start of communication, access to the control system is not continued by path switching even if tracking is recovered after that. *1 Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is powered OFF or reset.

Conditions for continued access Operation mode Backup mode, Separate mode

Redundant CPU specification Control system, Standby system, System A, System B

YES

YES

NO

NO

*1

*2

Start

Write processing (mdSend instruction), etc.

Did an error occur?

End

Execute normal processing. Process the error. Execute wait processing.

Retry processing

Check the error code.

Does the error require retry processing?

APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System 179

A

Checking method of path switching occurrence When the system is communicating with the redundant CPU specification, whether communication is continued by path switching due to communication error occurrence can be estimated. Create a program that monitors the following special relay and special registers to check the occurrence of path switching.

*1 Even if SM1600 is ON, path switching does not occur when the CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable. *2 When using SM1600, SD1590, and SD1690 to estimate the occurrence of path switching for the Redundant CPU connected via

MELSECNET/H, check the following items on the Redundant settings in the network parameter of GX Developer. Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout Issue system switch in communication error

Check the following based on the statuses of the above special relay and special registers, and remove the error cause. Check the Redundant CPU for an error. Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is correctly connected. Check both the relevant network module and the network where that relevant network module is connected for an error.

Access examples of path switching The following shows examples of path switching during access to the control system.

SM1600*1 SD1590*2 SD1690*2 Possibility of path switching Reference OFF Either one is other than 0 Since a system switching request from the network module was detected, path

switching may have been executed. Page 179 Access examples of path switching Figure 1

ON 0 0 Since another system error occurred, path switching may have been executed. Page 179 Access examples of path switching Figure 2

ON Either one is other than 0 Since another system error occurred or a system switching request from the network module was detected, path switching may have been executed.

Page 179 Access examples of path switching Figure 1, Figure 2

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/H

Control system Standby system

Control systemStandby system

Connection to the control system

Connection to the control system

Communication error

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

Tracking cable

Tracking cable

Personal computer (CC-Link IE Field Network board)

Personal computer (CC-Link IE Field Network board)

180 APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System

Path switching is not executed when a communication to the Redundant CPU specified at Logical station No. is faulty at communication start*1 (A communication error occurs.) When a communication is faulty, refer to the following and clear the communication disturbance. (Page 179 Checking method of path switching occurrence, Page 179 Access examples of path switching)

If other station access (including the programmable controller CPU other than the Redundant CPU) is made to 257 or more stations simultaneously, communication path may not be automatically switched.

*1 First communication after execution of the mdOpen function in the MELSEC data link library (communications using the mdReceiveEx, mdSendEx, mdDevRstEx, mdDevSetEx, mdRandREx, mdRandWEx, mdReceive, mdSend, mdControl, mdDevRst, mdDevSet, mdRandR, mdRandW or mdTypeRead function).

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/H

Control system Standby system

Control system Standby system

Standby system error

Connection to the control system

Connection to the control system

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET/H module

Tracking cable

Tracking cable

Personal computer (CC-Link IE Field Network board)

Personal computer (CC-Link IE Field Network board)

APPX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System 181

A

Details of the special relay and special registers to be monitored when estimating the occurrence of path switching

No. Name Description Description details SM1600 Other system error flag OFF: No error

ON: Error Turns ON when an error occurs by redundant system error check. (Turns ON when

any of bits for SD1600 turns ON.) Remains OFF when no errors are present.

SD1590 No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system

No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system

Any of the following bits turns ON corresponding to the No. of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system.

Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user.

For No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system, refer to SD1690.

SD1690 No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system

No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system

Any of the following bits turns ON corresponding to the No. of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system.

Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user.

For No. of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system, refer to SD1590.

SD1590 0 0/1 0/1 0 b15 b11 b1 b0 0 : OFF

1 : ON Each bit

Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots.

Module No.0 :

Module No.1 :

Module No.11:

Module to the right of a CPU module Rightmost module on 12-slot base unit (Q312B)

to

to

SD1690 0 0/1 0/1 0 b15 b11 b1 b0 0 : OFF

1 : ON Each bit

Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots.

Module No.0 :

Module No.1 :

Module No.11:

Module to the right of a CPU module Rightmost module on 12-slot base unit (Q312B)

to

to

182 APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses

Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses Describes the buffer memory of the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Link device area The areas to store the values of link devices.

Remote input (RX) (Address 0 to 1023 (0000H to 03FFH)) The areas to store the value of RX. The RX start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RX offset/size information. Page 184 RX offset/size information (Address 19456 to 19695 (4C00H to 4CEFH))

Remote output (RY) (Address 1024 to 2047 (0400H to 07FFH)) The areas to store the value of RY. The RY start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RY offset/size information. Page 184 RY offset/size information (Address 19712 to 19951 (4D00H to 4DEFH))

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Reference

0 to 18975 (0000H to 4A1FH) Link device area Page 182 Link device area

19456 to 20463 (4C00H to 4FEFH) Offset/size information Page 184 Offset/size information

20512 to 20536 (5020H to 5038H) Own station information Page 186 Own station information

20544 to 24383 (5040H to 5F3FH) Other station information Page 187 Other station information

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Reference

0 to 1023 (0000H to 03FFH) Remote input (RX) Page 182 Remote input (RX) (Address 0 to 1023 (0000H to 03FFH))

1024 to 2047 (0400H to 07FFH) Remote output (RY) Page 182 Remote output (RY) (Address 1024 to 2047 (0400H to 07FFH))

2048 to 10239 (0800H to 27FFH) Remote register (RWw) Page 183 Remote register (RWw) (Address 2048 to 10239 (0800H to 27FFH))

10240 to 18431 (2800H to 47FFH) Remote register (RWr) Page 183 Remote register (RWr) (Address 10240 to 18431 (2800H to 47FFH))

18432 to 18463 (4800H to 481FH) Link special relay (SB) Page 183 Link special relay (SB) (Address 18432 to 18463 (4800H to 481FH))

18464 to 18975 (4820H to 4A1FH) Link special register (SW) Page 183 Link special register (SW) (Address 18464 to 18975 (4820H to 4A1FH))

RX 3FFF

RX 3FFE

RX 3FFD

RX 3FFC

RX 3FFB

RX 3FFA

RX 3FF9

RX 3FF8

RX 3FF7

RX 3FF6

RX 3FF5

RX 3FF4

RX 3FF3

RX 3FF2

RX 3FF1

RX 3FF0

RX F

RX E

RX D

RX C

RX B

RX A

RX 9

RX 8

RX 7

RX 6

RX 5

RX 4

RX 3

RX 2

RX 1

RX 0

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

1023(03FFH)

0(0000H)

Buffer memory addresses

Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RX.

RY 3FFF

RY 3FFE

RY 3FFD

RY 3FFC

RY 3FFB

RY 3FFA

RY 3FF9

RY 3FF8

RY 3FF7

RY 3FF6

RY 3FF5

RY 3FF4

RY 3FF3

RY 3FF2

RY 3FF1

RY 3FF0

RY F

RY E

RY D

RY C

RY B

RY A

RY 9

RY 8

RY 7

RY 6

RY 5

RY 4

RY 3

RY 2

RY 1

RY 0

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

1024(0400H)

2047(07FFH)

Buffer memory addresses

Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RY.

APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 183

A

Remote register (RWw) (Address 2048 to 10239 (0800H to 27FFH)) The areas to store the value of RWw. The RWw start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWw offset/size information. Page 185 RWw offset/size information (Address 19968 to 20207 (4E00H to 4EEFH))

Remote register (RWr) (Address 10240 to 18431 (2800H to 47FFH)) The areas to store the value of RWr. The RWr start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWr offset/size information. Page 185 RWr offset/size information (Address 20224 to 20463 (4F00H to 4FEFH))

Link special relay (SB) (Address 18432 to 18463 (4800H to 481FH)) The areas to store the value of SB.

Link special register (SW) (Address 18464 to 18975 (4820H to 4A1FH)) The areas to store the value of SW.

RWw0

RWw1

RWw1FFF

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

10239(27FFH)

2048(0800H)

2049(0801H)

Buffer memory addresses

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

RWr0

RWr1

RWr1FFF

10240(2800H)

10241(2801H)

18431(47FFH)

Buffer memory addresses

SB 1FF

SB 1FE

SB 1FD

SB 1FC

SB 1FB

SB 1FA

SB 1F9

SB 1F8

SB 1F7

SB 1F6

SB 1F5

SB 1F4

SB 1F3

SB 1F2

SB 1F1

SB 1F0

SB F

SB E

SB D

SB C

SB B

SB A

SB 9

SB 8

SB 7

SB 6

SB 5

SB 4

SB 3

SB 2

SB 1

SB 0

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

18463(481FH)

18432(4800H)

Buffer memory addresses

Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of SB.

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b7b8b9b10b11b12b13b14b15

18975(4A1FH)

18465(4821H)

18464(4820H) SW0

SW1

SW1FF

Buffer memory addresses

184 APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses

Offset/size information The areas to store the device start number and number of points for each station number.

RX offset/size information (Address 19456 to 19695 (4C00H to 4CEFH)) The areas to store the RX start number and number of points for each station No.

The offset and size of buffer memory address for each station number (other than a station number 0) can be calculated using the following formulas: Offset buffer memory address = 19456 + (station number -1) 2 Size buffer memory address = 19457 + (station number -1) 2

RY offset/size information (Address 19712 to 19951 (4D00H to 4DEFH)) The areas to store the RY start number and number of points for each station No.

The offset and size of buffer memory address for each station number (other than a station number 0) can be calculated using the following formulas: Offset buffer memory address = 19712 + (station number -1) 2 Size buffer memory address = 19713 + (station number -1) 2

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal))

Name Reference

19456 to 19695 (4C00H to 4CEFH) RX offset/size information Page 184 RX offset/size information (Address 19456 to 19695 (4C00H to 4CEFH))

19712 to 19951 (4D00H to 4DEFH) RY offset/size information Page 184 RY offset/size information (Address 19712 to 19951 (4D00H to 4DEFH))

19968 to 20207 (4E00H to 4EEFH) RWw offset/size information Page 185 RWw offset/size information (Address 19968 to 20207 (4E00H to 4EEFH))

20224 to 20463 (4F00H to 4FEFH) RWr offset/size information Page 185 RWr offset/size information (Address 20224 to 20463 (4F00H to 4FEFH))

19695(4CEFH)

19694(4CEEH)

19459(4C03H)

19458(4C02H)

19457(4C01H)

19456(4C00H)

Buffer memory addresses

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.120

Station No.120

Offset

Size (in units of words)

Size (in units of words)

Offset

Offset

Size (in units of words)

19951(4DEFH)

19950(4DEEH)

19715(4D03H)

19714(4D02H)

19713(4D01H)

19712(4D00H)

Buffer memory addresses

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.120

Station No.120

Offset

Size (in units of words)

Size (in units of words)

Offset

Offset

Size (in units of words)

APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 185

A

RWw offset/size information (Address 19968 to 20207 (4E00H to 4EEFH)) The areas to store the RWw start number and number of points for each station number.

The offset and size of buffer memory address for each station number (other than a station number 0) can be calculated using the following formulas: Offset buffer memory address = 19968 + (station number -1) 2 Size buffer memory address = 19969 + (station number -1) 2

RWr offset/size information (Address 20224 to 20463 (4F00H to 4FEFH)) The areas to store the RWr start number and number of points for each station number.

The offset and size of buffer memory address for each station number (other than a station number 0) can be calculated using the following formulas: Offset buffer memory address = 20224 + (station number -1) 2 Size buffer memory address = 20225 + (station number -1) 2

20207(4EEFH)

20206(4EEEH)

19971(4E03H)

19970(4E02H)

19969(4E01H)

19968(4E00H)

Buffer memory addresses

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.120

Station No.120

Offset

Size (in units of words)

Size (in units of words)

Offset

Offset

Size (in units of words)

20463(4FEFH)

20462(4FEEH)

20227(4F03H)

20226(4F02H)

20225(4F01H)

20224(4F00H)

Buffer memory addresses

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.120

Station No.120

Offset

Size (in units of words)

Size (in units of words)

Offset

Offset

Size (in units of words)

186 APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses

Own station information The areas to store the own station's information on the network.

Network card information (Address 20512 to 20515 (5020H to 5023H))

Controller information (Address 20520 to 20536 (5028H to 5038H))

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal)) Name Description 20512 (5020H) Manufacturer code The own station's board information is stored.

20513 (5021H) Model type

20514 (5022H) Model code

20515 (5023H) Version

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal)) Name Description 20520 (5028H) Controller information valid/invalid flag Whether the value stored in the own station (controller)

information is valid or invalid is stored. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

20521 (5029H) Manufacturer code The own station's board information is stored.

20522 (502AH) Model type

20523 (502BH) Model code

20524 (502CH) Version

20525 to 20534 (502DH to 5036H) Model name string

20535 to 20536 (5037H to 5038H) Vendor-specific device information

APPX Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 187

A

Other station information The areas to store the other stations information on the network.

Station number 1 (Address 20544 to 20575 (5040H to 505FH)) Network card information (Address 20544 to 20551 (5040H to 5047H))

Controller information (Address 20552 to 20575 (5048H to 505FH))

Station number 2 to 120 (Address 20576 to 24383 (5060H to 5F3FH)) The information for station number 2 to 120 is stored in the same order as the information for other station (network card) information (station number 1) and other station (controller) information (station number 1).

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal)) Name Description 20544 (5040H) Manufacturer code The information of other station (station No.1) is stored.

20545 (5041H) Model type

20546 (5042H) Model code

20547 (5043H) Version

20548 to 20551 (5044H to 5047H) System area

Address (Decimal (Hexadecimal)) Name Description 20552 (5048H) Controller information valid/invalid flag Whether the value stored in the other station (controller)

information (station number 1) is valid or invalid is stored. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

20553 (5049H) Manufacturer code The other station's information is stored.

20554 (504AH) Model type

20555 (504BH) Model code

20556 (504CH) Version

20557 to 20566 (504DH to 5056H) Model name string

20567 to 20568 (5057H to 5058H) Vendor-specific device information

20569 to 20575 (5059H to 505FH) System area

188 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List A link special relay (SB) is turned ON/OFF depending on various factors at data link. Any error status of the data link can be confirmed by using and monitoring it in the program.

Application of the link special relay (SB) By using link special relays (SB), the status of the CC-Link IE Field Network can be checked.

Ranges of areas that are turned ON/OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special relays (SB) are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF. Range turned ON/OFF by users: SB0000 to SB001F Range turned ON/OFF by the system: SB0020 to SB01FF

Link special relay (SB) list A list of link special relays (SB) when they are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF is as follows.

Do not turn ON or OFF areas whose numbers are not on the link special relay (SB) list. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SB0000 Link start (own station)

The own station's cyclic transmission is restarted. OFF: No start direction ON: Start direction (enabled during start-up)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. For SB0000 to SB0003, this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON.

SB0001 Link stop (own station)

The own station's cyclic transmission is stopped. OFF: No stop direction ON: Stop direction (enabled during start-up)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. For SB0000 to SB0003, this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON.

SB0002 System link start Cyclic transmission of the entire system is restarted. The station where cyclic transmission is restarted is specified by the Link stop/start direction (SW0000 to SW0008). OFF: No start direction ON: Start direction (enabled during start-up)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. For SB0000 to SB0003, this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON.

SB0003 System link stop Cyclic transmission of the entire system is stopped. The station where cyclic transmission is stopped is specified by the Link stop/start direction (SW0000 to SW0008). OFF: No stop direction ON: Stop direction (enabled during start-up)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. For SB0000 to SB0003, this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON.

SB0006 Clear communication error count

Clears the link special registers for the communication error (SW0068 to SW006B, SW0074 to SW0077, SW007C to SW007F, SW0120 to SW015F). OFF: No clear direction ON: Clear direction

SB0009 Event count clear This clears the Event history status (SB007A) and Event count (SW007A). OFF: No clear direction ON: Clear direction (Errors are not counted while this is ON.)

SB0010 Temporary error invalid request

Stations specified in Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting (SW0010 to SW0017) are set as temporary error invalid stations. OFF: No request ON: Request issued

APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List 189

A

SB0011 Temporary error invalid setting cancel request

Stations specified in Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting (SW0010 to SW0017) are canceled from temporary error invalid stations. OFF: No request ON: Request issued

SB0012 Reserved station function disable request

Stations specified in Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting (SW0010 to SW0017) are temporarily canceled from reserved stations. OFF: No request ON: Request issued

SB0013 Reserved station specification enable request

Stations specified in Reserved station function disable/temporary error invalid station setting (SW0010 to SW0017) are returned to reserved stations. Only stations that were temporarily canceled can be returned to reserved stations. OFF: No request ON: Request issued

SB0030 RECV execution request flag (1)

This stores the data reception status of the own station's channel 1. OFF: No received data ON: Received data found

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0031 RECV execution request flag (2)

This stores the data reception status of the own station's channel 2. OFF: No received data ON: Received data found

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0040 Network type (own station)

Stores the network type of own station. ON: Field Network

SB0043 Mode (own station) Stores the mode of own station. OFF: Online ON: Not online

SB0044 Station setting (own station) (1)

This stores if the own station is a master station or not. OFF: Not master station ON: Master station

SB0045 Station setting (own station) (2)

This stores if the own station is a local station or not. OFF: Not local station ON: Local station

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Station setting (own station) (1) (SB0044) is OFF.

SB0047 Baton pass status (own station)

Stores the baton pass status for the own station (transient transmission possible). OFF: Normal ON: Error

If an error occurs, the cause of the error can be checked by the Baton pass status (own station) (SW0047) and Cause of baton pass interruption (SW0048). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Baton pass status (own station) (SW0047) and Cause of baton pass interruption (SW0048) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB0049 Data link status (own station)

Stores the own station's data link status. OFF: Normal ON: Error

If an error occurs, the cause of the error can be checked by Cause of data link stop (SW0049). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Cause of data link stop (SW0049) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB004A Own station's CPU status (1)

Stores the continuation error status of the own station's CPU module. OFF: Normal ON: Continuation error

SB004B Own station's CPU status (2)

Stores the stop error status of the own station's CPU module. OFF: Normal ON: Stop error

SB004C CPU RUN status (own station)

Stores the RUN status of the own station's CPU module. OFF: Normal ON: Reset status, driver stop by H/W error

SB004D Received parameter error

Stores the status of the received parameter. (own parameter status during master station) OFF: Parameter normal ON: Parameter error

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

190 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

SB0050 Link start request accept status (own station)

Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by Link start (own station) (SB0000) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted (SB0000 is OFF) ON: Start accepted (SB0000 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0051 Link start completion status (own station)

Turns ON when the Link start request accept status (own station) (SB0050) turns ON, and cyclic transmission start is completed. OFF: Start not completed (SB0000 is OFF) ON: Start completed (SB0000 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0052 Link stop request accept status (own station)

Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by Link stop (own station) (SB0001) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted (SB0001 is OFF) ON: Stop accepted (SB0001 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0053 Link stop completion status (own station)

Turns ON when Link stop request accept status (own station) (SB0052) turns ON, and the cyclic transmission stop is completed. OFF: Stop not completed (SB0001 is OFF) ON: Stop completed (SB0001 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0054 System link start request accept status

Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by System link start (SB0002) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted (SB0002 is OFF) ON: Start accepted (SB0002 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0055 System link start completion status

Turns ON when the System link start request accept status (SB0054) turns ON, and cyclic transmission start is completed. OFF: Start not completed (SB0002 is OFF) ON: Start completed (SB0002 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0056 System link stop request accept status

Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by System link stop (SB0003) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted (SB0003 is OFF) ON: Stop accepted (SB0003 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0057 System link stop completion status

Turns ON when the System link stop accept status (SB0056) turns ON, and cyclic transmission stop is completed. OFF: Stop not completed (SB0003 is OFF) ON: Stop completed (SB0003 is ON)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0058 Temporary error invalid request accept status

Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request (SB0010) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted (SB0010 is OFF) ON: Invalid accepted (SB0010 is ON)

SB0059 Temporary error invalid setting completion status

Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request accept status (SB0058) is turned ON and the temporary error invalid processing is completed. OFF: Not completed ON: Completed or error completion

SB005A Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept status

Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request (SB0011) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted ON: Cancel accepted

SB005B Temporary error invalid setting cancel completion status

Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept status (SB005A) is turned ON and the temporary error invalid setting cancel process is completed. OFF: Not completed ON: Completed or error completion

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List 191

A

SB005C Reserved station function disable request accept status

Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request (SB0012) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted ON: Cancel accepted

SB005D Reserved station function disable completion status

Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request accept status (SB005C) is turned ON and disabling the reserved station function is completed. OFF: Not completed ON: Completed or error completion

SB005E Reserved station specification enable request accept status

Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request (SB0013) is accepted. OFF: Not accepted ON: Enable accepted

SB005F Reserved station specification enabled status

Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request accept status (SB005E) is turned ON and the reserved station specification enable processing is completed. OFF: Not completed ON: Completed or error completion

SB0060 Constant link scan status

Stores the constant link scan status. OFF: Constant link scan is disabled ON: Constant link scan is enabled

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Data link status (own station) (SB0049) is OFF.

SB0061 Event history clear acceptance status

Turns ON when Event count clear (SB0009) is accepted. OFF: Not performed (SB0009 is OFF.) ON: Direction accepted (SB0009 is ON.)

SB0062 Event history clear completion status

Turns ON when Event history clear acceptance status (SB0061) turns ON and the number of events is cleared. OFF: Not performed (SB0009 is OFF.) ON: Completed (SB0009 is ON.)

SB0065 Loopback status Stores loopback execution status. The loopback station numbers can be checked by Loopback station number 1 (SW0070) and Loopback station number 2 (SW0071). OFF: Normal (no loopback stations) ON: Error (loopback being performed) (Loopback stations exist.)

(Conditions) This relay is valid while Loopback function setting status (SB0078) is ON.

SB006A PORT1 linkup status (own station)

Stores the linkup status of PORT1 (own station). OFF: Linkup in progress ON: Linkdown in progress

The time that the linkup starts after power-on or Ethernet cable connection may vary. Normally, it takes a few seconds. Depending on device status on the line, a linkup process is repeated, resulting in the increase in the time.

SB006B PORT2 linkup status (own station)

Stores the linkup status of PORT2 (own station). OFF: Linkup in progress ON: Linkdown in progress

The time that the linkup starts after power-on or Ethernet cable connection may vary. Normally, it takes a few seconds. Depending on device status on the line, a linkup process is repeated, resulting in the increase in the time.

SB006C PORT1 error frame reception status (own station) (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in the own station's PORT1. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred.

SB006D PORT2 error frame reception status (own station) (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in the own station's PORT2. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred.

SB006E PORT1 error frame reception detection status (own station) (latch) (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in the own station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred.

SB006F PORT2 error frame reception detection status (own station) (latch) (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in the own station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

192 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

SB0072 Scan mode setting information

Stores the scan mode setting status. OFF: Asynchronous mode ON: Synchronous mode

SB0074 Reserved station specification status

Stores the reserved station specification status due to parameters. The station number set for a reserved station can be checked by Reserved station specification (SW00C0 to SW00C7). OFF: Not specified ON: Specified

SB0075 Error invalid station setting status

Stores the Error invalid station setting status due to parameters. The station number set for the error invalid station can be checked by Error invalid station setting (SW00D0 to SW00D7). OFF: Not specified ON: Specified

SB0077 Parameter reception status

Stores the parameter reception status from the master station. OFF: Reception completed ON: Reception not completed

SB0078 Loopback function setting status

Stores the setting status of the loopback function configured by the parameter OFF: Not used ON: Used

SB007A Event history status Stores the network event history occurrence. OFF: No event history ON: Event history found

If the event history is found, the cumulative number of network event history can be checked by the Event count (SW007A). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Event count (SW007A) may be offset by one sequence scan. This area is cleared when Event count clear (SB0009) is turned ON.

SB007B Input data status of data link faulty station

Stores the own station's setting status for "Data Link Faulty Station Setting". OFF: OFF or cleared to 0 ON: Hold

SB007D Hold/clear status setting for CPU STOP

Stores the own station's setting status for "Output Setting during CPU STOP". OFF: Hold ON: Clear (ALL OFF)

SB008C PORT1 error frame reception status (own station) (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in the own station's PORT1. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred.

SB008D PORT2 error frame reception status (own station) (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in the own station's PORT2. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred.

SB008E PORT1 error frame reception detection status (own station) (latch) (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in the own station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred.

SB008F PORT2 error frame reception detection status (own station) (latch) (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in the own station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred.

SB0090 Hardware test completion status

Stores the hardware test completion status. OFF: Not executed or execution in progress ON: Completed

If completed, the completion status can be checked by Hardware test normal/ abnormal end (SB0091).

SB0091 Hardware test normal/abnormal end

Stores the hardware test normal completion or abnormal completion status. OFF: Normal completion ON: Abnormal completion

(Conditions) This is enabled when Hardware test completion status (SB0090) is ON.

SB0092 Self-loopback test completion status

Stores the self-loopback test completion status. OFF: Not executed or execution in progress ON: Completed

If completed, the completion status can be checked by Self-loopback test normal/ abnormal end (SB0093).

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List 193

A

SB0093 Self-loopback test normal/abnormal end

Stores the self-loopback test normal completion or abnormal completion status. OFF: Normal completion ON: Abnormal completion

(Conditions) This is enabled when Self-loopback test completion status (SB0092) is ON.

SB0094 Loop test completion status

Stores the loop test completion status. OFF: Not executed or execution in progress ON: Completed

If completed, the completion status can be checked by Loop test normal/abnormal end (SB0095).

SB0095 Loop test normal/ abnormal end

Stores the loop test normal completion or abnormal completion status. OFF: Normal completion ON: Abnormal completion

(Conditions) This is enabled when Loop test completion status (SB0094) is ON.

SB0098 Network configuration mismatch occurrence status

Stores the match or mismatch status of the actual network configuration and the network map of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. OFF: Match ON: Mismatch

After return or addition of the slave station, SB0098 may be turned ON regardless of the actual match/mismatch status.

SB0099 Number of connected modules over occurrence status

Stores whether the number of slave stations (including a submaster station) connected is 120 or less, or 121 or more. OFF: 120 or less ON: 121 or more

Number of connected modules is the total of the slave stations (including a submaster station) which are currently connected and the disconnected stations (slave stations which were previously connected).

SB009A Loop test request accept status

Stores the loop test request accept status. OFF: Loop test not accepted ON: Loop test accepted

The master station is turned ON during loop test mode. The slave stations are turned ON during the loop test and turned OFF when the loop test is completed.

SB00A0 Baton pass status (each station)

Stores the baton pass status for each station. OFF: All stations normal ON: Faulty station found

If a faulty station is found, the status of each station can be checked by Baton pass status (each station) (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Baton pass status (each station) (SW00A0 to SW00A7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

SB00A1 Baton pass status (master station)

Stores the baton pass status for master station. OFF: Normal ON: Error

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00B0 Data link status (each station)

Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station. OFF: Cyclic transmission for all stations in progress ON: Cyclic transmission not executed for some stations

If cyclic transmission are not executed for some stations, the status of each station can be checked by Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Data link status (each station) (SW00B0 to SW00B7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

194 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

SB00B1 Data link status (master station)

Stores the cyclic transmission status for the master station. OFF: Normal ON: Error

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00B8 Network connection status (each station)

Stores if any network connection station is found. OFF: No network connection station ON: Network connection station found

If a network connection station is found, the status of each station can be checked using Network connection status (SW00B8 to SW00BF). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Network connection status (SW00B8 to SW00BF) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB00C0 Reserved station specification

Stores if there are any reserved stations. OFF: No reserved stations ON: Reserved stations found

If a reserved station is found, the status of each station can be checked by Reserved station specification (SW00C0 to SW00C7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Reserved station specification (SW00C0 to SW00C7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00D0 Error invalid station setting

Stores if there are any error invalid stations. OFF: No error invalid stations ON: Error invalid station found

If an error invalid station is found, the status of each station can be checked by Error invalid station setting (SW00D0 to SW00D7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Error invalid station setting (SW00D0 to SW00D7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00E0 Temporary error invalid station status

Stores if there are any temporary error invalid stations. OFF: No temporary error invalid stations ON: Temporary error invalid station found

If a temporary error invalid station is found, the status of each station can be checked by Temporary error invalid station setting (SW00E0 to SW00E7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Temporary error invalid station setting (SW00E0 to SW00E7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00E8 Station type match status (each station)

Stores the station type match status of each station. OFF: Station type match in all stations ON: Station type mismatch station found

If a station type mismatch station is found, the status of each station can be checked using Station type match status (SW00E8 to SW00EF). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Station type match status (SW00E8 to SW00EF) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB00F0 CPU RUN status (each station)

Stores the RUN status of each station's CPU module. OFF: All stations are in RUN or STEP-RUN status ON: Station in STOP or PAUSE status found

If a station in STOP or PAUSE status is found, the status of each station can be checked by the CPU RUN status (each station) (SW00F0 to SW00F7). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of CPU RUN status (each station) (SW00F0 to SW00F7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB00F1 CPU RUN status (master station)

Stores the RUN status of the master station's CPU module. OFF: RUN or STEP-RUN status ON: STOP or PAUSE status

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List 195

A

SB00F8 Network number match status

Stores the network number match status of each station. OFF: Network number match in all stations ON: Network number mismatch station found

If a network number mismatch station is found, the status of each station can be checked using Network number match status (SW00F8 to SW00FF). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Network number match status (SW00F8 to SW00FF) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB0100 Operation status (each station) (1)

Stores the moderate/major error or stop error status of each station. When the target station is the master/local module, the occurrence status on the control CPU is stored. OFF: No moderate/major error (stop error) ON: Station with a moderate/major error (stop error) exists

If a station with a moderate/major error (stop error) is found, the status of each station can be checked with Operation status (each station) (1) (SW0100 to SW0107). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Operation status (each station) (1) (SW0100 to SW0107) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0101 CPU operation status (master station) (1)

Stores the stop error status of the master station's CPU module. OFF: Normal ON: Stop error occurred

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0108 Station number duplication occurrence status

Stores the station number duplication occurrence status of each station. OFF: No duplication of station number ON: Station number duplicated

If a station number is duplicated, the status of each station can be checked using Station number duplication occurrence status (SW0108 to SW010F). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Station number duplication occurrence status (SW0108 to SW010F) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB0110 Operation status (each station) (2)

Stores the minor error or continuation error status of each station. When the target station is the master/local module, the occurrence status on the control CPU is stored. OFF: All stations normal or station with a moderate/major error(stop error) exists ON: Station with a minor error (continuation error) exists

If a station with a minor error (continuation error) is found, the status of each station can be checked by Operation status (each station) (2) (SW0110 to SW0117). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Operation status (each station) (2) (SW0110 to SW0117) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0111 CPU operation status (master station) (2)

Stores the continuation error status of the master station's CPU module. OFF: Normal ON: Continuation error occurred

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0120 PORT1 current error frame reception status (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT1. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (1) (SW0120 to SW0127). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (1) (SW0120 to SW0127) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0121 PORT1 error frame reception status (master station)

Stores if an error frame is received at the master station's PORT1. OFF: An error frame has not yet been received ON: An error frame has been received

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

196 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

SB0128 PORT1 current error frame reception status (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT1. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (2) (SW0128 to SW012F). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (2) (SW0128 to SW012F) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0130 PORT2 current error frame reception status (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT2. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (1) (SW0130 to SW0137). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (1) (SW0130 to SW0137) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0131 PORT2 error frame reception status (master station)

Stores if an error frame is received at the master station's PORT2. OFF: An error frame has not yet been received ON: An error frame has been received

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0138 PORT2 current error frame reception status (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT2. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (2) (SW0138 to SW013F). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (2) (SW0138 to SW013F) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0140 PORT1 error frame reception detection status (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT1 error frame reception detection status (1) (SW0140 to SW0147). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT1 error frame reception detection status (1) (SW0140 to SW0147) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0141 PORT1 error frame detection (master station)

Stores if an error frame is received from power-on until the present at the master station's PORT1. OFF: An error frame has not yet been received ON: An error frame has been received at least once

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List 197

A

SB0148 PORT1 error frame reception detection status (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT1 error frame reception detection status (2) (SW0148 to SW014F). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT1 error frame reception detection status (2) (SW0148 to SW014F) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0150 PORT2 error frame reception detection status (1)

Stores if a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT2 error frame reception detection status (1) (SW0150 to SW0157). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT2 error frame reception detection status (1) (SW0150 to SW0157) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0151 PORT2 error frame detection (master station)

Stores if an error frame is received from power-on until the present at the master station's PORT2. OFF: An error frame has not yet been received ON: An error frame has been received at least once

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0158 PORT2 error frame reception detection status (2)

Stores if a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. OFF: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in

any stations. ON: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in one or

more stations. If a receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred, the status of each station can be checked by PORT2 error frame reception detection status (2) (SW0158 to SW015F). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of PORT2 error frame reception detection status (2) (SW0158 to SW015F) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SB0170 Parameter error status (each station)

Stores the parameter status for each station. OFF: No parameter errors for any stations ON: Parameter error detected at one or more stations

If a parameter error occurs, the status of each station can be checked by the Parameter error status (each station) (SW0170 to SW0177). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Parameter error status (each station) (SW0170 to SW0177) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

198 APPX Appendix 3 Link Special Relay (SB) List

SB0180 Reserved station function disable status

This stores if a reserved station function is disabled. OFF: No disabled reserved station function ON: Disabled reserved station function found

If a reserved station function is disabled, the status of each station can be checked by the Reserved station function disable status (SW0180 to SW0187). Depending on the timing of the link refresh, the update of Reserved station function disable status (SW0180 to SW0187) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 199

A

Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List Link special registers (SW) store information during data link as numerical values. Error locations and causes can be checked by using and monitoring link special registers (SW) in programs.

Application of link special registers (SW) By using link special registers (SW), the status of the CC-Link IE Field Network can be checked.

Ranges of areas that are turned ON/OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special register (SW) is assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF. Range where data are stored by users: SW0000 to SW001F Range where data are stored by the system: SW0020 to SW01FF

Link special register (SW) list A list of link special registers (SW) when they are assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF is described as follows.

Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the link special register (SW) list. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0000 Link stop/start direction

Sets the station where cyclic transmission is stopped or started. 00H: Own station 01H: All stations 02H: Specified station 80H: Own station (Forced link start) 81H: All stations (Forced link start) 82H: Specified station (Forced link start)

Stopping/starting of cyclic transmission is performed by System link start (SB0002) or System link stop (SB0003). When Specified station (02H or 82H) is selected, the own station is not included.

SW0001 to SW0008

Link stop/start direction

When setting 02H or 82H by the Link stop/start direction (SW0000), this sets the station number that stops or starts cyclic transmission. 0: No direction issued for stop or start 1: Direction issued for stop or start

SW0009 Arrival monitoring time (RIRD/RIWT)

Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion. If the direction is not completed within the time, it is resent for the number of resends specified by the Number of resends (RIRD/RIWT) (SW000B). 0: 10 seconds (default value) 1 to 360: 1 to 360 seconds

If a value outside the above settings is made, operation is performed for 360 seconds. If the Number of resends (RIRD/RIWT) (SW000B) is set, the time until the dedicated instruction fails is shown below. (Number of resends (RIRD/RIWT) + 1) Arrival monitoring time (RIRD/RIWT)

SW0001

SW0002

SW0003

SW0004

SW0005

SW0006

SW0007

SW0008

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents station No.

200 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW000B Number of resends (RIRD/RIWT)

If the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by the Arrival monitoring time (RIRD/RIWT) (SW0009), this specifies the number of times that the instruction is resent. 0: Not resent (default value) 1 to 7: 1 to 7 times

If a value outside the above settings is made, the instruction is resent 7 times.

SW0010 to SW0017

Reserved station function disable/ temporary error invalid station setting

Specifies the slave stations where reserved station function disable or temporary error invalid station setting/cancel is performed. 0: Not specified 1: Specified

(Conditions) Some stations cannot be specified as reserved station function disable or

temporary error invalid station setting/cancel. (Page 134 Reserved station function enable, Page 135 Enable/Disable ignore station errors)

Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW001A Number of resends (REMFR/REMTO)

Specifies the number of resends for the REMFR/REMTO instruction. 0: 0 times (default) Outside the above: Number of times that is set

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW001B Response wait timer (REMFR/REMTO)

Specifies the response wait time for the REMFR/REMTO instruction. 0: 10 seconds (default) Outside the above: Number of seconds that is set

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0030 Send/receive instruction (1) processing result

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the own station's channel 1. 0: Normal completion 1 or higher: Abnormal completion (Page 167 Error Code List)

SW0031 Send/receive instruction (2) processing result

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the own station's channel 2. 0: Normal completion 1 or higher: Abnormal completion (Page 167 Error Code List)

SW0040 Network number Stores the network number of own station. Range: 1 to 239

SW0042 Station number Stores the station number of own station. Range: 1 to 120 (master station: 125)

SW0043 Mode status Stores the mode of own station. 0: Online (Normal Mode) (Local station: Online) 1: Online (High Speed Mode) 2: Offline 6: Loop test 7: Self-loopback test 9: Hardware test

SW0046 Module type Stores the own station's hardware status.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0010

SW0011

SW0012

SW0013

SW0014

SW0015

SW0016

SW0017

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents station No.

SW0046

b15 b2 b0b1

0 0

Module type 00: Module 01: Board 10: HMI

to

to

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 201

A

SW0047 Baton pass status (own station)

Stores the baton pass status for the own station (transient transmission possible). 0: Data link in progress 2: Baton pass in progress 3: Baton pass stopped 4: Test in progress 5: Offline

SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption

Stores the cause of interruption in the communication (baton pass) of own station. 00H: At normal communication or power-on 30H: Cable disconnection 33H: Disconnection or reconnection in progress 40H: Offline mode 41H: Hardware test 42H: Self-loopback test

SW0049 Cause of data link stop

Stores the cause which stopped the data link of own station. 00H: At normal communication or power-on 01H: Stop command issued 02H: Monitoring timeout 05H: No slave stations (master station only) 10H: Parameter not received (local stations only) 11H: Own station number out of range 12H: Own station specified as reserved 13H: Station number duplication (own station) 14H: Master station duplication 16H: Station number not set 18H: Parameter error 19H: Parameter communication in progress 1AH: Station type mismatch 20H: CPU module stop error 60H: Incorrect ring topology configuration (master station only)

SW004A Data link stop request station

Stores the station number of the station that performed the cyclic transmission stop request for the own station. Range: 125 (master station), 1 to 120 (local station)

The cyclic transmission stop request is performed by System link stop (SB0003). (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW004B Own station's CPU status

Stores the own station's status. 00H: No module mounted 01H: STOP (Normal) 02H: STOP (Stop error occurring) 03H: STOP (Continuation error occurring) 04H: RUN (Normal) 05H: RUN (Continuation error occurring) 06H: STEP-RUN 07H: PAUSE 0EH: Reset in progress 0FH: Initial processing

SW004C Parameter setting status

Stores the parameter status. 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Received parameter error (SB004D) is ON.

SW0050 Data link start status (own station)

Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by Link start (own station) (SB0000). 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Link start (own station) (SB0000) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

202 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW0051 Data link stop status (own station)

Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by Link stop (own station) (SB0001). 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Link stop (own station) (SB0001) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0052 Data link start status (entire system)

Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by System link start (SB0002). 0: Normal 1 or higher: Error definition in own station (Page 167 Error Code List)

When System link start (SB0002) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0053 Data link stop status (entire system)

Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by System link stop (SB0003). 0: Normal 1 or higher: Error definition in own station (Page 167 Error Code List)

When System link stop (SB0003) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0054 Temporary error invalid station setting result

Stores the results when executing the temporary error invalid station setting. 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Temporary error invalid request (SB0010) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared.

SW0055 Temporary error invalid station setting cancel result

Stores the results when canceling the temporary error invalid station setting. 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Temporary error invalid setting cancel request (SB0011) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared.

SW0056 Result of reserved station function disable

Stores the result when disabling reserved station function. 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Reserved station function disable request (SB0012) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared.

SW0057 Result of reserved station function enable

Stores the result when reserved station function disable is undone. 0: Normal 1 or higher: Abnormal (Page 167 Error Code List)

When Reserved station specification enable request (SB0013) is turned OFF, the stored error definition is cleared.

SW0058 Number of total slave stations (setting)

Stores the number of total slave stations that are set by the parameters. Range: 1 to 120

SW0059 Number of total slave stations (current value)

Stores the number of total slave stations that are actually connected by data link in the CC-Link IE Field Network. Range: 1 to 120 (0 when own station is disconnected)

SW005A Maximum baton pass station

Stores the maximum station number of the stations where the baton pass is performed. Range: 1 to 120 (0 when own station is disconnected)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW005B Maximum cyclic transmission station

Stores the maximum station number of the station where the cyclic transmission is performed. Range: 1 to 120 (0 when own station is disconnected)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Data link status (own station) (SB0049) is OFF.

SW0060 Maximum link scan time

Stores the maximum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0061 Minimum link scan time

Stores the minimum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 203

A

SW0062 Current link scan time

Stores the current value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. The stored value contains a maximum error of 1 ms. (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

SW0063 Constant link scan set value

Stores the setting value of the contact link scan that is set in the supplementary setting. 0: No setting 1 to 200: Setting value of contact link scan time (Unit: ms)

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Data link status (own station) (SB0049) is OFF.

SW0064 Connection status (own station)

Stores the connection status of own station. 00H: Normal (communication in progress on PORT1 and PORT2) 01H: Normal (communication in progress on PORT1, cable disconnected on

PORT2) 04H: Normal (loopback communication in progress on PORT1, cable disconnected

on PORT2) 10H: Normal (cable disconnected on PORT1, communication in progress on

PORT2) 11H: Disconnecting (cable disconnected on PORT1 and PORT2) 12H: Disconnecting (cable disconnected on PORT1, establishing line on PORT2) 21H: Disconnecting (establishing line on PORT1, cable disconnected on PORT2) 22H: Disconnecting (establishing line on PORT1 and PORT2) 40H: Normal (cable disconnected on PORT1, loopback communication in progress

on PORT2)

SW0066 Actual link scan time (lower 1 word)

Stores the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: s)

SW0067 Actual link scan time (upper 1 word)

SW0068 PORT1 line error occurrence rate (max.)

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the own station's PORT1. (Unit: %) When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored occurrence rate is cleared.

SW0069 PORT1 line error occurrence rate (present)

Stores the occurrence rate (current value) of received error frames at the own station's PORT1. (Unit: %) When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored occurrence rate is cleared.

SW006A PORT2 line error occurrence rate (max.)

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the own station's PORT2. (Unit: %) When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored occurrence rate is cleared.

SW006B PORT2 line error occurrence rate (present)

Stores the occurrence rate (current value) of received error frames at the own station's PORT2. (Unit: %) When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored occurrence rate is cleared.

SW0070 Loopback station number 1

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed. The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 2 (SW0071). 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Slave station 125: Master station 255: Station number not set

If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback, this register stores the duplicated number. (Conditions) This is enabled when Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF and Network configuration mismatch occurrence status (SB0098) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

204 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW0071 Loopback station number 2

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed. The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 1 (SW0070). 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Slave station 125: Master station 255: Station number not set

If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback, this register stores the duplicated number. (Conditions) This is enabled when Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF and Network configuration mismatch occurrence status (SB0098) is OFF.

SW0074 PORT1 cable disconnection detection count

Stores the (cumulative) count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared.

SW0075 PORT1 receive error detection count

Stores the (cumulative) count that error data was received at the PORT1. The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Mode status (SW0043) is 0 or 1. (during online)

SW0076 PORT1 total number of received data (lower 1 word)

Stores the (cumulative) count that error data was received at the PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Mode status (SW0043) is 0 or 1. (during online)

SW0077 PORT1 total number of received data (upper 1 word)

SW007A Event count Stores the count of the network event history. This stored count is cleared when Event count clear (SB0009) is turned ON.

SW007C PORT2 cable disconnection detection count

Stores the (cumulative) count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared.

SW007D PORT2 receive error detection count

Stores the (cumulative) count that error data was received at the PORT2. The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Mode status (SW0043) is 0 or 1. (during online)

SW007E PORT2 total number of received data (lower 1 word)

Stores the (cumulative) count that error data was received at the PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored count is cleared. (Conditions) This is enabled when the Mode status (SW0043) is 0 or 1. (during online)

SW007F PORT2 total number of received data (upper 1 word)

SW0080 to SW009F

Execution status (REMFR/REMTO)

Stores the REMFR/REMTO execution status for each channel.

0: Normal completion 1 or higher: Abnormal completion (Page 167 Error Code List)

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0080 SW0081 SW0082 SW0083 SW0084 SW0085 SW0086 SW0087 SW0088 SW0089

SW008A

SW008B SW008C SW008D SW008E SW008F SW0090 SW0091 SW0092 SW0093 SW0094

SW0095

SW0096 SW0097 SW0098 SW0099 SW009A SW009B SW009C SW009D SW009E SW009F

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

Channel 5 Channel 6

Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10

Channel 11

Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15

Channel 16 Channel 17

Channel 18 Channel 19 Channel 20 Channel 21

Channel 22

Channel 23 Channel 24 Channel 25 Channel 26

Channel 27 Channel 28

Channel 29 Channel 30 Channel 31 Channel 32

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 205

A

SW00A0 to SW00A7

Baton pass status (each station)

Stores the baton pass status for each station. 0: Baton pass normal station 1: Baton pass faulty station

If multiple stations change from faulty to normal, because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan, the time until the status changes to "0: Baton pass normal station" may vary by several seconds. If cables are connected/disconnected or the module is reset in line and ring

topologies, the token may be lost or a reconstruction may occur, causing the baton pass status to detect an error in the first link scan.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

SW00B0 to SW00B7

Data link status (each station)

Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station. 0: Cyclic transmission normal station 1: Cyclic transmission faulty station

If multiple stations change from faulty to normal, because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan, the time until the status changes to "0: Cyclic transmission normal station" may vary by several seconds. If no response is received for several link scans, the station is determined to be a cyclic transmission faulty station.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW00A0

SW00A1

SW00A2

SW00A3

SW00A4

SW00A5

SW00A6

SW00A7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00B0

SW00B1

SW00B2

SW00B3

SW00B4

SW00B5

SW00B6

SW00B7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

206 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW00B8 to SW00BF

Network connection status

Stores the connection status to the network. 0: Station not connected to the network 1: Station connected to the network

(Conditions) This is not affected by Baton pass status (each station) (SW00A0 to SW00A7) and

Data link status (each station) (SB00B0, SW00B0 to SW00B7). This is enabled only for the station which has same network number as that of the

master operating station.

SW00C0 to SW00C7

Reserved station specification

Stores the setting status of the reserved station. 0: Other than reserved station (also includes stations specified as reserved station

disable status) 1: Reserved station

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW00C8 to SW00CF

Parameter setting status

Stores the parameter setting status. 0: Station not set in the parameter 1: Station set in the parameter

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW00B8

SW00B9

SW00BA

SW00BB

SW00BC

SW00BD

SW00BE

SW00BF

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00C0

SW00C1

SW00C2

SW00C3

SW00C4

SW00C5

SW00C6

SW00C7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00C8

SW00C9

SW00CA

SW00CB

SW00CC

SW00CD

SW00CE

SW00CF

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 207

A

SW00D0 to SW00D7

Error invalid station setting

Stores the setting status of error invalid stations. 0: Other than error invalid station 1: Error invalid station

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW00E0 to SW00E7

Temporary error invalid station setting

Stores the setting status of the temporary error invalid station. 0: Other than temporary error invalid station 1: Temporary error invalid station

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

SW00E8 to SW00EF

Station type match status

Stores the match status between the station type set in the master station and that of the slave station. 0: Station type match 1: Station type mismatch

(Conditions) This is enabled only for the station in which Network connection status (SW00B8 to

SW00BF) is ON and is connected to the network.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW00D0

SW00D1

SW00D2

SW00D3

SW00D4

SW00D5

SW00D6

SW00D7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00E0

SW00E1

SW00E2

SW00E3

SW00E4

SW00E5

SW00E6

SW00E7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00E8

SW00E9

SW00EA

SW00EB

SW00EC

SW00ED

SW00EE

SW00EF

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

208 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW00F0 to SW00F7

CPU RUN status (each station)

Stores the RUN status of each station. 0: RUN, STEP-RUN 1: STOP, PAUSE, stop error

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

SW00F8 to SW00FF

Network number match status

Stores the match status between the network number of the master station and that of the slave station. 0: Network number match 1: Network number mismatch

SW0100 to SW0107

Operation status (each station) (1)

Stores the moderate/major error or stop error status of each station. When the target station is the master/local module, the occurrence status on the control CPU is stored. 0: No moderate/major error (stop error) 1: Moderate/major error (stop error) occurring

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW00F0

SW00F1

SW00F2

SW00F3

SW00F4

SW00F5

SW00F6

SW00F7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120 Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW00F8

SW00F9

SW00FA

SW00FB

SW00FC

SW00FD

SW00FE

SW00FF

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0100

SW0101

SW0102

SW0103

SW0104

SW0105

SW0106

SW0107

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 209

A

SW108 to SW10F

Station number duplication occurrence status

Stores the occurrence status of station number duplication. 0: No duplication of station number 1: Station number duplicated

SW0110 to SW0117

Operation status (each station) (2)

Stores the minor error or continuation error status of each station. When the target station is the master/local module, the occurrence status on the control CPU is stored. 0: Normal operation, or a moderate/major error (stop error) occurring 1: Minor error (continuation error) occurring

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0108

SW0109

SW010A

SW010B

SW010C

SW010D

SW010E

SW010F

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0110

SW0111

SW0112

SW0113

SW0114

SW0115

SW0116

SW0117

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

210 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW0120 to SW0127

PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (1)

Stores the station number occurring a receive frame error line status caution level in each station's PORT1. 0: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT1. 1: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in each station's

PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

SW0128 to SW012F

PORT1 current error frame reception status (each station) (2)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT1. 0: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT1. 1: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in each

station's PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0120

SW0121

SW0122

SW0123

SW0124

SW0125

SW0126

SW0127

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0128

SW0129

SW012A

SW012B

SW012C

SW012D

SW012E

SW012F

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 211

A

SW0130 to SW0137

PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (1)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT2. 0: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT2. 1: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in each station's

PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

SW0138 to SW013F

PORT2 current error frame reception status (each station) (2)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT2. 0: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT2. 1: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in each

station's PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0130

SW0131

SW0132

SW0133

SW0134

SW0135

SW0136

SW0137

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0138

SW0139

SW013A

SW013B

SW013C

SW013D

SW013E

SW013F

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

212 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW0140 to SW0147

PORT1 error frame reception detection status (1)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. 0: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT1. 1: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in each station's

PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

SW0148 to SW014F

PORT1 error frame reception detection status (2)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT1 from power-on until the present. 0: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT1. 1: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in each

station's PORT1. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0140

SW0141

SW0142

SW0143

SW0144

SW0145

SW0146

SW0147

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0148

SW0149

SW014A

SW014B

SW014C

SW014D

SW014E

SW014F

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 213

A

SW0150 to SW0157

PORT2 error frame reception detection status (1)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status caution level has occurred in each station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. 0: A receive frame error line status caution level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT2. 1: A receive frame error line status caution level has been occurred in each station's

PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

SW0158 to SW015F

PORT2 error frame reception detection status (2)

Stores the station number where a receive frame error line status warning level has occurred in each station's PORT2 from power-on until the present. 0: A receive frame error line status warning level has not yet been occurred in each

station's PORT2. 1: A receive frame error line status warning level has been occurred in each

station's PORT2. When Clear communication error count (SB0006) is turned ON, the stored status is cleared.

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0150

SW0151

SW0152

SW0153

SW0154

SW0155

SW0156

SW0157

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0158

SW0159

SW015A

SW015B

SW015C

SW015D

SW015E

SW015F

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

214 APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List

SW0170 to SW0177

Parameter error status (each station)

Stores the parameter status for each station. 0: No parameter error 1: Parameter error found

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are

ignored.

SW0180 to SW0187

Reserved station function disable status

Stores the station that is currently in reserved station function disable status. 0: No reserved station function disable is specified 1: Reserved station function disable in progress

(Conditions) This is enabled when the Baton pass status (own station) (SB0047) is OFF. Holds the data immediately before the error. This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status (each station)

(SW00A0 to SW00A7). Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW0194 Loop test result Stores a loop test result. 0: Normal completion Other than 0: Abnormal end (Refer to the figure below.)

b0: Master station duplicated b1: Station number duplicated b2: Invalid station No. b3: Reserved station specification error

(A station that exists on the network is set as a reserved station in the master station.) b4: All stations faulty b5: Inconsistent total number of slave stations b6: Station type setting error b7: Loopback stations exist. b8 to b15: Fixed to 0

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW0170

SW0171

SW0172

SW0173

SW0174

SW0175

SW0176

SW0177

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0180

SW0181

SW0182

SW0183

SW0184

SW0185

SW0186

SW0187

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

SW0914

b15 b14 b1 b0to

APPX Appendix 4 Link Special Register (SW) List 215

A

SW01A0 to SW01A7

Loop test error station

Stores the execution result of a loop test. 0: Normal 1: Error

Number Name Description Availability

Master station

Local station

SW01A0

SW01A1

SW01A2

SW01A3

SW01A4

SW01A5

SW01A6

SW01A7

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 12345678910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132

33343536373839404142434445464748

49505152535455565758596061626364

65666768697071727374757677787980

81828384858687888990919293949596

979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112

113114115116117118119120

Each number in the table represents a station No. is fixed to 0.

216 APPX Appendix 5 Processing Time

Appendix 5 Processing Time The processing time of the CC-Link IE Field Network consists of the time components below. Sequence scan + Link refresh time + Link scan time + Slave station processing time = Transmission delay time

Link refresh time: Page 216 Link refresh time Link scan time: Page 217 Link scan time Slave station processing time: Manual for the slave station used Transmission delay time: Page 217 Transmission delay time

Link refresh time The following is a calculation formula for the link refresh time. Number of boards that can be installed 1 [ms] With a single board installed, the link refresh time of maximum link device points (36k bytes) is less than 1ms.

Influence by other driver processing and Windows kernel processing The execution of the link refresh processing may be delayed by the interruption of other driver processing or Windows kernel processing.

External device

External device

Personal computer

Slave station

Link device

Link scan time

Master station (board)

Link device

Link refresh

time

Processing time of slave station

User program

Driver

APPX Appendix 5 Processing Time 217

A

Link scan time The following is a calculation formula for the link refresh time. (when the link scan mode is asynchronous)

Transmission delay time The following are the calculation formulas for the transmission delay time.

Master station (RX) Slave station (input) The following table shows the time after a signal is input to the slave station until the board device of the master station turns ON or OFF.

SM: Master station link refresh time LS : Link scan time

Master station (RY) Slave station (output) The following table shows the time after the board device is turned ON or OFF until the output of the slave station is turned ON or OFF.

SM: Master station link refresh time LS : Link scan time

Item Cyclic transmission mode

Normal mode High speed mode Ka 25.8 When "Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data (RX/RY)" is set

in the network operation setting: 18.5 When "Hold Input Data (RX/RY)" is set in the network

operation setting: 9.75

Kb 655 168

Kc (Maximum transient processing time)

160 + 60 Total number of slave stations set in the parameters

80

Kd (Maximum data link processing time when disconnecting from network or reconnecting to network)

When the serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17022' or higher: Number of disconnected stations 3500

When the serial number (first five digits) of the master station is '17021' or lower: 9000 + Total number of ports used in the switching hub 3000 (9000 when the switching hub is not used)

Calculation value Calculation formula Normal value SM 0.5 + LS 1 + slave station response time [ms]

Maximum value SM 1 + LS 2 + slave station response time [ms]

Calculation value Calculation formula Normal value SM + LS 1 + slave station response time [ms]

Maximum value SM + LS 2 + slave station response time [ms]

8 2LS = 0.08

+

+

0.02 [ms]

RY pointsRX points (RWr points + RWw points)

(Number of connected slave stations Ka) Kb Kc Kd

(Number of event conditions in Event Setting)

1000

218 APPX Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes

Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes

This section explains the differences between "Online (Normal Mode)" and "Online (High Speed Mode)" for the CC-Link IE Field Network board. Refer to the information in this section to select "Online (Normal Mode)" and "Online (High Speed Mode)".

Differences in performance specifications The following items can be selected.

Differences in link scan time The link scan times in normal mode and high speed mode are shown below when assigning 128 points to RX/RY per station, 64 points to RWw/RWr per station, and the number of connected stations is increased.

Item Online (Normal mode) Online (High speed mode) Maximum number of RWw send points per local station 1024 points, 2048 bytes 256 points, 512 bytes

Maximum number of transients per link scan 4 + slave stations 1.5 4

Total number of stations

Link scan time (ms) Total number of points for link devices (bytes)Online (Normal mode) Online (High speed mode)

Network Operation Setting: "Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data (RX/ RY)"

Network Operation Setting: "Hold Input Data (RX/RY)"

2 0.75 0.24 0.23 576

4 0.85 0.33 0.29 1152

8 1.05 0.49 0.42 2304

16 1.44 0.82 0.68 4608

32 2.22 1.49 1.21 9216

64 3.78 2.82 2.26 17280

120 6.52 5.14 4.09 34560

1281129680644832160 0.00

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

Total number of stations

Li nk

s ca

n tim

e [m

s]

Normal mode High speed mode_Input data OFF

High speed mode_Input data held

APPX Appendix 7 Comparison of CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network 219

A

Appendix 7 Comparison of CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network

This section explains the differences in the specifications between CC-Link Ver.2 board and CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Performance specifications comparison Transmission and interface specifications

*1 These are values in remote net ver.2 mode or remote net additional mode.

Hardware specifications

Item Specifications

CC-Link Ver.2 board CC-Link IE Field Network board Maximum link points per network RWw 2048 points*1 8192 points

RWr 2048 points*1 8192 points

RX 8192 points*1 16384 points

RY 8192 points*1 16384 points

Maximum number of send points per station

Master station RWw 2048 points*1 8192 points

RY 8192 points*1 16384 points

Local station RWw 128 points*1 Online (Normal mode): 1024 points Online (High speed mode): 256 points

RY 896 points*1 2048 points

Transmission specifications

Communication speed Selectable from 156 kbps/625 kbps/ 2.5 Mbps/5 Mbps/10 Mbps

1 Gbps

Connection cable CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated high- performance cable Ver.1.10- compatible CC-Link dedicated cable

An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher (double shielded, STP), straight cable (Page 29 Cables)

Maximum station-to-station distance

30 cm to 1200 m (varies depending on connected stations and transmission speed)

100 m (compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)) (Page 51 Ethernet cable connection)

Overall cable distance 1200 m (at transmission speed of 156 kbps)

Line topology: 12000 m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations) Star topology: Depends on the system configuration Ring topology: 12100 m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)

Network topology Bus topology Line topology, star topology (coexistence of line topology and star topology is possible.), ring topology

Number of connected stations in one network

Master station 1 station (up to 64 remote stations can be connected to master station)

1 station (up to 120 slave stations can be connected to master station)

Local station 26 stations 120 stations

Station type Master station, local station

Communication method Broadcast polling Token passing method

Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points)

Item Specifications

CC-Link Ver.2 board CC-Link IE Field Network board

Q80BD- J61BT11N

Q81BD-J61BT11 Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Internal current consumption

0.56 A (5 VDC) 1.06 A (3.3 VDC) 1.10 A (5 VDC) 1.68 A (3.3 VDC)

Installation slot PCI slot PCI Express slot PCI bus slot, PCI-X slot PCI Express slot

Standard Low profile

External dimensions 121(H)19(W)153(D) [mm] 121(H)18.5(W)181(D) [mm]

121(H)18.5(W)181(D) [mm]

80(H)18.5(W)181(D) [mm]

Weight 0.11 kg 0.11 kg 0.08 kg 0.07 kg

220 APPX Appendix 7 Comparison of CC-Link and CC-Link IE Field Network

Functional comparison Added functions The following are the functions added in the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Modified functions The following are the functions modified in the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Function Description Reference Cyclic transmission Mode selection for cyclic

transmission This mode can be selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the frequencies of cyclic transmission and transient transmission. The mode can be selected from "Online (Normal mode)" and "Online (High- speed mode)".

Page 100 Network type and mode Page 218 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes

Transient transmission Seamless transmission with different networks

Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient transmission to stations in different networks. Communication is also possible with the CC-Link IE Controller Network, and MELSECNET/H.

Page 68 Communication with different networks

CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

Network configuration display

The network configuration can be checked by the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics of CC-Link IE Field Utility.

Page 118 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Loop test Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each station.

Page 53 Loop test

Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable. Page 54 Cable test

Communication test Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from the own station to the target station is correct.

Page 55 Communication test

Network event history The history of events that occurred in the own station and on the network is displayed. For the master station, the event history of the entire network can be displayed, and so it can be used for troubleshooting at network start-up.

Page 132 Network event history

Other Reserved station temporary disablement

Reserved stations can be temporarily disabled without changing parameters.

Page 74 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function Page 134 Reserved station function enable

Function Notes during replacement Slave station cut-off function When the CC-Link IE Field Network is connected in a line topology, stations after the disconnected station

become data link faulty stations. To prevent disconnection of normal stations, connect the CC-Link IE Field Network in a star topology. (Page 20 Network configuration)

Standby master function No standby master function is available in the CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Data link status setting for error occurrence of CC-Link module master station CPU

The setting is fixed to "Continue" for CC-Link IE Field Network.

APPX Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software 221

A

Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software There is no restriction when using CC-Link IE Field Network board with other MELSEC interface boards or MELSOFT products on the same personal computer. For the restrictions of the applicable operating environment or applicable access target, refer to the manual of each product.

222 APPX Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version

Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version

Explains a method for checking a serial number and a function version of CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Checking on the rating plate The serial number and function version of CC-Link IE Field Network board can be checked in the SERIAL column of rating plate.

Checking on the CC IE Field utility The serial number and function version are displayed on the "Board Diagnostics" screen in the CC IE Field Utility.

Window

[Diagnostics] [Board Diagnostics]

The serial number displayed in the SERIAL column of the "Board Diagnostics" screen in the CC IE Field Utility may differ from that on the rating plate of the CC-Link IE Field Network board. The serial number in the SERIAL column of the rating plate of the CC-Link IE Field Network board indicates

the management information of the product. The serial number displayed in the "Board Diagnostics" screen in the CC IE Field Utility indicates the

functional information of the product. The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added.

B

Serial no.(first 5 digits) Function version

Function versionSerial no.(first 5 digits)

APPX Appendix 10 Added and Changed Functions 223

A

Appendix 10Added and Changed Functions Change of hardware function The following table shows the new or improved function for CC-Link IE Field Network board.

Update of software package For details of the updated version of software and the functions which are added or changed, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Obtaining the updated version Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Installation method 1. Save the obtained data for installation to the system drive, CD-ROM, etc.

2. Start the installer. Double-click "Setup.exe" in the folder.

3. By following the on-screen instructions, select or enter the necessary information.

When the version of software package to be installed is Ver.1.17T or later, the software package the version of which is Ver.1.16S or earlier must be uninstalled in advance. For precautions for installation, refer to the following section. Page 79 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions

Manual For the function and handling method of the updated version of software package, refer to the corresponding manual. The manual is stored in the 'Manual' folder of the software package. After the installation, the manual can be displayed by selecting [Help] [Manual] from the menu in CC IE Field Utility.

Added/changed contents First five digits of the serial number

Version of SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

Parameter setting function for CC-Link IE Field Network remote device station (mdRemBufWriteEx function, mdRemBufReadEx function)

15102 or higher 1.06G or later (A 64-bit version user application is supported by SW1DNC-CCIEF-B version 1.12N or later.)

Change of the calculation method for maximum data link processing time when the station is disconnected from or returned to the network, which is used for the link scan time formula

17022 or higher

Network map update in the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

Connection to a MELSEC iQ-R series redundant system including CC-Link IE Field Network

18042 or higher

224 APPX Appendix 11 Restrictions for Operating System

Appendix 11 Restrictions for Operating System For the following operating systems, use SW1DNC-CCIEF-B with the supported version. The following version of software and manual are provided continuously.

Do not use a function added by a version newer than the supported version.

Obtaining the supported version Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative.

Installation method 1. Save the obtained data for installation to the system drive, CD-ROM, etc.

2. Start the installer. Double-click "Setup.exe" in the folder.

3. By following the on-screen instructions, select or enter the necessary information.

Manual For the function and handling method, refer to the manual of the product. The manual is stored in the 'Manual' folder of the software package.

Operating system Supported version

SW1DNC-CCIEF-B Manual number Windows Server 2008 Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows XP

1.09K SH-080980ENG-I

APPX Appendix 12 Windows Warning Message 225

A

Appendix 12Windows Warning Message Overview of warning message When using an operating system with the user account control function, a warning message appears when the utility is activated. (Page 85 Starting and Exiting)

Methods for preventing warning message

The user account control (UAC) function prevents a crash (e.g. prevention of start-up of a program which executes unintended operation). Before setting this function, grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk.

The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message.

Disabling user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function.

Operating procedure

1. Open [Control Panel].

226 APPX Appendix 12 Windows Warning Message

2. Select [System and Security].

3. Select [Change User Account Control settings].

4. Set the slide bar to "Never notify" and click the [OK] button.

Setting completed

APPX Appendix 12 Windows Warning Message 227

A

Allowing operation without displaying warning message The following shows a procedure for allowing an operation without displaying a warning message.

Operating procedure

1. Open [Control Panel].

2. Select [System and Security].

3. Select [Administrative Tools].

228 APPX Appendix 12 Windows Warning Message

4. Select [Local Security Policy]. When user account control is enabled, the following screen appears. Click the [Continue] or [Yes] button.

5. Select [Local Policies].

6. Select [Security Options].

7. Select [User Account Control: Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent].

APPX Appendix 12 Windows Warning Message 229

A

8. Select [Elevate without prompting] on the [Local Security Setting] tab, and click the [OK] button.

Setting completed

230 APPX Appendix 13 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup

Appendix 13Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup

CC-Link IE Field Network board does not support the power save mode (hibernate, sleep) and fast startup. The following explains the behavior of the personal computer when the personal computer enters each mode.

Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode (hibernate, sleep)

Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode (hibernation, sleep) Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019 Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8, Windows Server 2012 Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

Behavior when entering the hibernation mode/sleep mode The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode (hibernate, sleep) is entered on the personal computer. The CC-Link IE Field Network board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network. The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode (hibernate, sleep). After the personal computer returns from the power save mode (hibernate, sleep), "-28141(9213H) : System sleep error"

occurs when accessing CC-Link IE Field Network board from the CC IE Field utility or an application program, which includes MELSEC data link library function.

Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode (hibernate, sleep), the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager. For details of MELSECPowerManager, refer to the following section. Page 231 MELSECPowerManager

Behavior when fast startup function is enabled

Target operating system The following operating systems have the fast startup function. Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019 Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8, Windows Server 2012

Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled The following explains the behavior of the board when the fast startup function is enabled. The board is not reconnected even after the fast startup. After the fast startup, "-28141(9213H) : System sleep error" occurs when accessing CC-Link IE Field Network board from

the CC IE Field utility or an application program, which includes MELSEC data link library function.

Corrective action When the fast startup function is enabled on the personal computer, the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager. For details of MELSECPowerManager, refer to the following section. Page 231 MELSECPowerManager

APPX Appendix 14 MELSECPowerManager 231

A

Appendix 14MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows Power Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the power save mode (hibernate, sleep) or the fast startup function. MELSECPowerManager is applicable for the following operating systems. Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019 Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8, Windows Server 2012 Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2 When a personal computer is set to enter the power save mode (hibernate, sleep) or the fast startup function is enabled, the following message is displayed and the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager.

Installing MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to a personal computer. The operation starts after the OS is restarted.

Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is uninstalled. However, it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC network interface board is installed to the personal computer. Uninstall all software packages for MELSEC network interface board installed on the personal computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager.

Checking MELSECPowerManager The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of MELSECPowerManager. The following is a setting example when using Windows 7.

Operating procedure

1. Open [Control Panel], and select [System and Security].

232 APPX Appendix 14 MELSECPowerManager

2. Select [Administrative Tools].

3. Double-click [Services].

4. Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered.

End

APPX Appendix 14 MELSECPowerManager 233

A

When MELSECPowerManager is disabled, the personal computer may enter the power save mode (hibernate, sleep) automatically depending on the settings on the personal computer. Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the CC-Link IE Field Network board does not function normally if the personal computer enters the power save mode (hibernate, sleep). For the behavior of the board when the personal computer enters the power save mode (hibernate, sleep), or the fast startup function is enabled, refer to the following section. (Page 230 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup)

If MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally, right-click "MELSECPowerManager" on the "Services (Local)" screen and select [Start] from the menu.

234 APPX Appendix 15 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Appendix 15EMC and Low Voltage Directives In each country, laws and regulations concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and electrical safety are enacted. For the products sold in the European countries, compliance with the EU's EMC Directive has been a legal obligation as EMC regulation since 1996, as well as the EU's Low Voltage Directive as electrical safety regulation since 1997. Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to attach a "CE marking" on their products in European countries. In some other countries and regions, manufacturers are required to make their products compliant with applicable laws or regulations and attach a certification mark on the products as well (such as UK Conformity Assessed (UKCA) marking in the UK, and Korea Certification (KC) marking in South Korea). Each country works to make their regulatory requirements consistent across countries based on international standards. When the requirements are consistent, measures to comply with the EMC and electrical safety regulations become common across countries. The UK and South Korea have enacted EMC regulations whose requirements are consistent with those of the EMC Directive. The UK has also enacted electrical safety regulations whose requirements are consistent with those of the Low Voltage Directive. In this section, the requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are described as examples of those of the EMC and electrical safety regulations.

Measures to comply with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive sets requirements for emission (conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference emitted by a product) and immunity (the ability of a product not to be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic interference). This section describes the precautions for machinery constructed with this product to comply with the EMC Directive. These precautions are based on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards. However, they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Directive.

EMC Directive related standards Emission requirements

*1 The tests were conducted with the product installed in a control panel. *2 QP: Quasi-Peak value, Mean: Average value

Standard Test item Test description Value specified in standard EN61131-2: 2007 CISPR16-2-3

Radiated emission*1 The electromagnetic wave which the product emits to the external space is measured.

30 to 230 MHz, QP: 40 dBV/m (measured at 10 m distance)*2

230 to 1000 MHz, QP: 47 dBV/m (measured at 10 m distance)

CISPR16-2-1, CISPR16-1-2 Conducted emission*1

The noise level which the product emits to the power line is measured.

0.15 to 0.5 MHz, QP: 79 dB, Mean: 66 dB*2

0.5 to 30 MHz, QP: 73 dB, Mean: 60 dB

APPX Appendix 15 EMC and Low Voltage Directives 235

A

Immunity requirements

*1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel.

Installation in a control panel This ensures safety as well as effective shielding of electromagnetic noise emitted from a personal computer.

Control panel Use a conductive control panel. Mask off an area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts. To ensure electrical contact between inner plates and the control panel, mask off the bolt installation areas of each inner

plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest area. Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies. Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10 cm or less. If the diameter is larger than 10 cm, electromagnetic

wave may leak. In addition, because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance between the control panel and its door, reduce the clearance as much as possible. Use of EMI gaskets (sealing the clearance) can suppress undesired radiated emissions.

The tests were conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation using a control panel having damping characteristics of 37 dB (maximum) and 30 dB (average) (measured at 3 m distance, 30 to 300 MHz).

Power cable and ground cable Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power of a personal computer. Ground the FG terminal of the personal

computer to the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible (a thickness at least 2 , a length of 30 cm or shorter).

Twist the ground cable extended from the ground point with the power cable so that larger amount of noise generated from the power cable is absorbed to the ground. Note that if a noise filter is attached to the power cable, twisting may not be required.

Standard Test item Test description Value specified in standard EN61131-2: 2007 EN61000-4-2

Electrostatic discharge immunity*1

An electrostatic discharge is applied to the enclosure of the equipment.

8kV Air discharge 4kV Contact discharge

EN61000-4-3 Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity*1

An electric field is radiated to the product. 80% AM modulation @1kHz 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m 1.4 to 2.0 GHz: 3 V/m 2.0 to 2.7 GHz: 1 V/m

EN61000-4-4 Fast transient/burst immunity*1

Burst noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

AC/DC power, I/O power, and AC I/O (unshielded) lines: 2kV

DC I/O, analog, and communication lines: 1kV

EN61000-4-5 Surge immunity*1

Lightning surge is applied to power lines and signal lines.

AC power, AC I/O power, and AC I/O (unshielded) lines: 2kV CM, 1kV DM

DC power and DC I/O power lines: 0.5kV CM, 0.5kV DM

DC I/O, AC I/O (shielded), analog, and communication lines: 1kV CM

EN61000-4-6 Conducted RF immunity*1

High-frequency noise is applied to power lines and signal lines.

0.15 to 80 MHz 80% AM modulation @1kHz, 10Vrms

EN61000-4-8 Power-frequency magnetic field immunity*1

The product is immersed in the magnetic field of an induction coil.

50/60 Hz, 30 A/m

EN61000-4-11 Voltage dips and interruption immunity*1

Power voltage is momentarily interrupted. 0%, 0.5 period, starting at zero crossing 0%, 250/300 period (50/60 Hz) 40%, 10/12 period (50/60 Hz) 70%, 25/30 period (50/60 Hz)

236 APPX Appendix 15 EMC and Low Voltage Directives

Cables Use a shielded cable for a cable extended out of the control panel. If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise immunity will not meet the required value.

CC-Link IE Field Network cables The precautions for using CC-Link IE Field Network cables are described below. Use a cable recommended by CC-Link Partner Association. The cable is shielded. Strip a part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield to the largest area.

Grounding a shielded cable Ground the shield of a shielded cable as close to the exit from the control panel as possible. Otherwise, the cable after the ground point will cause electromagnetic induction, and will generate a higher harmonic noise. Ground the exposed shield to a large area on the control panel. A clamp can be used as shown below. In this case, mask off the inner wall surface of the control panel, which comes in contact with the clamp.

Do not use the tip of a PVC wire soldered onto a shield of the shielded cable for grounding. Doing so will raise the high-frequency impedance, resulting in loss of the shielding effect.

Grounding cables with a cable clamp Use shielded cables for external wiring and ground the shields of the shielded cables to the control panel with an AD75CK cable clamp (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric). Ground the shields within 20 to 30 cm from the module.

For details on the AD75CK, refer to the following: AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual

(1) Shield (2) Clamp

(1) Paint mask (2) Clamp

(1)

(2)

(2)

(1)

PVC wire

Solderless terminal

Shielded cable

AD75CK

CC-Link IE Field Network board

Inside the control panel

20 to 30cm

APPX Appendix 15 EMC and Low Voltage Directives 237

A

Noise filter (power supply line filter) A noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10 MHz or less frequency band. (Use of a noise filter can suppress noise.) The following are the installation precautions. Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter. If bundled, the noise on the output side is

induced into the filtered cable on the input side.

Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel with the shortest cable possible (approximately 10 cm).

Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive This board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000 VAC and 75 to 1500 VDC.

Input side (power supply side)

Input side (power supply side)

Output side (device side)

Output side (device side)

Filter Filter

Induction

Noise will be induced when the input and output cables are bundled.

Separately install the input and output cables.

238 APPX Appendix 16 External Dimensions

Appendix 16External Dimensions The following figures show the external dimensions of each board.

Q80BD-J71GF11-T2

(Unit: mm) 98

.5

10 7

175

181

18.5

12 1

5

5

3.2

APPX Appendix 16 External Dimensions 239

A

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 (standard size)

(Unit: mm)

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 (low profile size)

(Unit: mm)

5 3.2

5

5 3.2

5

240

INDEX

0 to 9 32-bit data assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

A About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Automatic return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

B Block data assurance per station . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Board Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,182

C Cable clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 CC IE Field Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 CC IE Field Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,83 CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics . . . . . . . . 118 Channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,112 Cyclic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

D D LINK LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Data link faulty station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Device Monitor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,115 Driver WDT function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Driver WDT monitoring time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

E EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Error invalid station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 External dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

F Function version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

H Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

I Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

L L ERR. LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Line topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Link device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Link points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Link refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,216 Link scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,217

Link special register (SW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Link special relay (SB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Local station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Loopback function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,102 Low profile size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

M Master station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 MD functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,218 MODE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

N Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Network type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Number of connectable stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

P P1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 P2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Patch cord removal tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 PCI bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 PCI Express bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 PORT1 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 PORT2 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

R RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Rating plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Remote input (RX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Remote output (RY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Remote register (RWr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Remote register (RWw) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Reserved station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Ring topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Routing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,108 RWr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,183 RWw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,183 RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,182 RY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,182

S Screw tightening torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Slave station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,57 Standard size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Star topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

T Temporary error invalid station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Transient transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

241

I

U Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

242

REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Japanese manual number: SH-080925-S

2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Revision date *Manual number Description May 2011 to June 2015

SH(NA)-080980ENG-A to SH(NA)-080980ENG-I

Due to the transition to the e-Manual, the details of revision have been deleted.

May 2016 SH(NA)-080980ENG-J Complete revision (layout change)

September 2016 SH(NA)-080980ENG-K Added or modified parts Section 2.4, Section 6.2, Section 8.1, Chapter 12, Section 13.2, Section 16.2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 11, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 14

January 2017 SH(NA)-080980ENG-L Added or modified parts Chapter 14, Appendix 10

March 2017 SH(NA)-080980ENG-M Added or modified parts Section 2.4

September 2017 SH(NA)-080980ENG-N Added or modified parts Section 2.4, Section 6.1, Section 16.2

July 2019 SH(NA)-080980ENG-O Added or modified parts RELEVANT MANUALS, Section 2.4, Section 6.1, Appendix 13, Appendix 14, Appendix 15, Appendix 16

February 2020 SH(NA)-080980ENG-P Added or modified parts Section 2.4

September 2021 SH(NA)-080980ENG-Q Added or modified parts Appendix 15

January 2022 SH(NA)-080980ENG-R Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1, Section 2.4, Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 16.2, Appendix 10, Appendix 11, Appendix 15 Deleted part PACKING LIST

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

243

WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which

follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused

by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions

or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.

6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.

Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and

compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

244

TRADEMARKS Adobe and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/ or other countries. Celeron, Intel, and Pentium are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PCI Express is either a registered trademark or a trademark of PCI-SIG. Microsoft, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

SH(NA)-080980ENG-R(2201)KWIX MODEL: SW1-CCIEF-B-U-E MODEL CODE: 13JZ58

Specifica

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric Q80BD J71GF11 T2 User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.